Home

NetDVR - Moonblink Communications

1. 12 Editing Settings for Devices 12 Editing Settings for Cameras 12 Renaming a Camera 12 Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras 12 Editing Settings for Audio Sources 13 Disabling Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources 13 Import of DLKs 16 Device Administration 17 Camera Administration 23 Ad
2. 212 Point and Click Control 212 PTZ Navigation Buttons 213 PTZ Preset Positions 213 IPIX PTZ Preset Positions 213 On All Tabs 215 On Live Tab Only 216 On Browse Tab Only 216 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 3 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Web and Realtime Feed Servers
3. 48 Audio Source Administration 49 Monitor Administration 50 Recording Server Service Management 52 Pausing the Recording Server Service 52 Resuming the Recording Server Service 53 Stopped Recording Server Service 53 Scheduling 53 Set and Clear Modes 55 Zoom Feature 55 Good to Know when You Set Online Per
4. 153 NetGuard EVS 156 Download Installation amp Login 158 Views 161 Further Configuration 173 Day to Day Use 186 Logging Out 195 NetGuard 196 If You Log in for the First Time 199 Logging in on Different Computers
5. 132 Image Bars 132 Storing and Recalling Views 133 What to Do 134 What to Do 135 What to Do 136 De interlacing 138 Zoom Controls 138 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 2 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Smoothening and Scaling
6. 60 Days to Keep 60 Input Events amp Output 68 Four Types of Events 68 Specifying Input Events and Output 69 I O Setup 69 Event Buttons 81 Generic Events 85 I O Control 95 How to 97
7. 220 Web Server Setup 222 User Administration 223 Testing the Web Server Configuration 224 Starting the Web Server 224 Stopping the Web Server 225 Shutting Down the Web Server 225 Starting the Realtime Feed Server 225 Stopping the Realtime Feed Server 226 Shutting Down the Realtime Feed Server 226 Logging
8. 231 Administrator Log Files 231 Monitor Application Log Files 231 Recording Server Service Log Files 231 Event Log Files 231 Image Server Log Files 232 Image Server Audit Log Files 232 Export Log Files 232 Web Server Log Files 232 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 4 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Introduc
9. 206 Apply to All 206 Point and Click Control 209 PTZ Navigation Buttons 209 PTZ Preset Positions 209 IPIX PTZ Positions 210 Master Time Area 211 Browse Buttons 211 Time Sliders 211 Playback Slider and Buttons 211 Go To Time
10. 199 Creating a Private Group 201 Creating a View in a Private Group 201 Adding Cameras to the View 201 Creating a Shared Group 202 Creating a View in a Shared Group 202 Adding Cameras to the View 202 Using Your Views on Different Computers 203 Image Quality 206 Frame Rate 206 IPIX Split Mode
11. In the Patrolling bar active periods are indicated in gray Changes between patrolling schemes are indicated by a thin vertical line Note that the Patrolling bar is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which patrolling has been set up Tip When several patrol schemes are in use you are able to see which patrol scheme is used for a particular period Click the relevant section of the gray bar the name of the patrol scheme in question will appear in the Patrol scheme list located below the calendar section Colored bars indicating active periods Camera Alerts Scheduler Window s Copy and Paste Buttons Button Description Copy Schedule Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section When used in combination with the Paste Schedule button you are able to quickly re use schedules from one camera to another Paste Schedule Lets you paste a copied schedule for use with the selected camera The same copied schedule can be pasted to several cameras simply by selecting and pasting to one camera after the other Tip If you want to use a schedule for all cameras specify a schedule for one camera then use the Copy and Paste to All button to copy the schedule and paste it to all cameras in one go Copy and Paste to All Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section and paste it to all cameras in one go 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400
12. 138 Viewer How to 139 Remote Access 143 Programming Differences Net or Not 147 Installation Differences 147 Feature Differences 148 Image Server Administration 148 Defining Users 150 Defining User Access Rights 150 NetGuard Users 153 NetGuard EVS Users
13. Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVR Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVR such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In most cases events occur and actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by NetDVR users System administrators define the criteria for each event for example a certain amount of detected motion or input from a specific sensor when the criteria are met the system interprets it as an event and automatically triggers the required actions However you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur For this purpose NetDVR lets you define event buttons Event buttons let users manually trigger events from the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS In the NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list See also About Event
14. Lets you add an end parenthesis character to the Event message include field AND Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday In the above example the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve Example Few results match the criterion User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday OR Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday In the above example the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sundaymust be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 89 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example Many results match the criterion User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday Remove Lets you remove the item immediately to the
15. Archiving 117 Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory 118 Archiving Audio 118 Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives 119 Exported Archives 119 Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras 120 Specifying Archiving Locations for Specific Cameras 120 Cameras Not Included in the Monitor Application 122 One Possible Scenario Avoiding Using Resources on Displaying Cameras Images in Monitor 122 Another Possible Scenario Hiding Cameras Images from Prying Eyes 122 Important Guidelines for Using
16. Change the port number in the Server Port field 5 Locate the file playbackfeed html in the HTML directory under the directory in which the NetDVR software is installed 6 Edit the file playbackfeed html by changing the port number in the line RTFeed port 9513 to the required port number RealtimeFeed Server Administrator s Guide to Day to Day Operation Once you run the Realtime Feed Server remote users will be able to connect to it for live image feeds Starting the Realtime Feed Server The Realtime Feed Server may already be running When the Realtime Feed Server is running the Realtime Feed Server icon appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Realtime Feed Server icon If the icon is not present you must start the Realtime Feed Server To start the Realtime Feed Server do the following 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Select All Programs 3 Select NetDVR gt Realtime Feed Server The RealtimeFeed Server icon now appears in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar RealtimeFeed Server icon 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 225 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 4 Click the Realtime Feed Server icon This will open the NetDVRRealtime Feed Server window If the Autostart check box is selected the Realtime Feed Server will automatically start
17. If the Autostart check box is not selected the Realtime Feed Server must be started manually by clicking the Start button 5 Connecting users IP addresses and progress can be viewed in the NetDVRRealtime Feed Server window s Connections section Stopping the Realtime Feed Server To stop the Realtime Feed Server click the NetDVRRealtime Feed Server window s Stop button This will stop the Realtime Feed Server without shutting it down This means that you will quickly be able to start the Realtime Feed Server again by clicking the Start button Shutting Down the Realtime Feed Server To shut down the Realtime Feed Server click the NetDVRRealtime Feed Server window s Shut down button This will shut down the Realtime Feed Server and you will have to access it from Window s Start menu in order to start it again When clicking the Shut down button you will be asked to confirm that you want to shut down the Realtime Feed Server Installation dependent features Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Provided the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are running on the NetDVR surveillance system remote users are able to connect to the survei
18. User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field Event message include Displays the string which will be used for the actual package analysis The field is not as such editable However you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where a new item should be included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons Likewise you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button Add Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message include field 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 92 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc See also the description of the Event substring and Event message includes fields Lets you add a start parenthesis to the Event message include field Parentheses can be used to ensure that semantically related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday In the example the two OR terms will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of the string In other words
19. 1 is the primary position in which images from the latest event are always shown 2 is the secondary position in which images from the previously detected event are always shown 3 is the 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 172 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc tertiary position in which images from the event detected before the event in position 2 are always shown and so on The selected number cannot be higher than the total number of NetMatrix positions in the view If the view only contains one NetMatrix position the position must have number 1 if the view contains for example four NetMatrix positions they must be numbered from 1 to 4 Connection Settings Button only available when the view s NetMatrix position 1 is selected other NetMatrix positions in the view inherit the connection settings specified for position 1 Clicking the Connection Settings button lets you specify the TCP Port and Password used when transferring NetMatrix triggered images from the surveillance server to the NetGuard EVS view By default the TCP port used for NetMatrix is 12345 consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about which port number or password to use 4 Repeat if more NetMatrix positions are required in the view Further Configuration In the Setup tab s Properties section you are able to adjust a number of settings
20. Always store all received images in the database Never Never store any received images in the database Live images will be displayed but since no images are kept in the database users will not be able to browse images from the camera Conditionally Store received images in the database when certain conditions are met When you select this option specify required conditions in the following fields On motion Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select check box to store all images in which motion is detected On event Note Use of storage on event requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select check box to store all images regardless of motion when an external event occurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists Number of seconds pre post recordings on event Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only You are able to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion
21. NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 224 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Stopping the Web Server To stop the Web Server click the NetDVR Web Server window s Stop server button This will stop the Web Server without shutting it down This means that you will quickly be able to start the Web Server again by clicking the Start server button Shutting Down the Web Server To shut down the Web Server click the NetDVR Web Server window s Shut down button This will shut down the Web Server and you will have to access it from Window s Start menu in order to start it again When clicking the Shut down button you will be asked to confirm that you want to shut down the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server Configuration The Realtime Feed Server does not require any configuration apart from its default image quality specified as part of the configuration of the Web Server You are however able to change the port number used by the Realtime Feed Server when communicating with the ActiveX Real Time Client default is port 9513 To change the port number do the following 1 Make sure the Realtime Feed Server is started see Starting the RealtimeFeed Server below 2 Access the Realtime Feed Server window by clicking the Realtime Feed Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar 3 Stop the Realtime Feed Server by clicking the Stop button 4
22. Recording is not affected by muting audio in the Monitor Admin Login For users without administrator rights access to certain features in NetDVR may in some organizations have been restricted Provided you know the administrator password the Admin Login button lets you access such protected features Clicking the Admin Login button opens the Administrator Login window in which you are able to specify the administrator password and log in to NetDVRas an administrator When you are logged in as an administrator the Admin Login button changes to Admin Logout Clicking the Admin Logout button will restore any restrictions Administrator Lets you access the Administrator application The Administrator application is used for configuring NetDVR upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system Note Accessing the Administrator application from the Monitor may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button When you close the Administrator application and return to the Monitor the Monitor will be restarted Certain settings notably settings for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are not configurable when the Administrator application is accessed from the Monitor application To configure such settings you must close the Monitor application and open the Administrator application separately Exit Exits the Monitor closing down the application and thereby stoppi
23. click the plus sign next to the device to which the camera is attached select the required camera then click the Settings button to open the Camera Settings for Device name Camera Name window Renaming a Camera To rename a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears This will open the Camera Name and Number window in which you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras Users of the NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such keyboard shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera These camera shortcut numbers are specified in the Administrator To assign a shortcut number to a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears This will open the Camera Name and Number window in which you are able to specify a shortcut number to be used with the camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or the NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Tip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in the NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 12 Administr
24. the database is likely to be reached earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording video It is thus a very good idea to use archiving if using audio sources Storage Capacity Required for Archiving The storage capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan to archive Some organizations want to keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several months or years Other organizations may only want to archive recordings from one or two cameras and they may want to keep their archives for much shorter periods of time Before enabling archiving you should always consider the storage capacity of the local drive containing the default archiving directory to which archives are always moved even though they may immediately after be moved to an archiving location on a network drive As a rule of thumb the capacity of the local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all cameras for which archiving has been specified When archiving data from a camera to external locations including archiving locations on network drives NetDVR automatically checks that the space required for data to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space is available at the external location If not the external archive location s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived In short When estimating s
25. the system will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday Lets you add an end parenthesis to the Event message include field AND Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday In the above example the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve Example Few results match the criterion User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday OR Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday In the above example the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sundaymust be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 93 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc As a rule of thum
26. window in two ways o From the Administrator window by selecting a camera in the Device Manager section then clicking the Settings button o From the Monitor Manager window by selecting the required camera then clicking the Settings button The Monitor Manager window is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window contains the following sections and buttons Framerate Settings The Framerate Settings section lets you specify the camera s recording speeds in the following fields Field Description Desired framerate Specify required number of frames in first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list Example 8 frames per second Tip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields Enable speedup NetDVR is able to increase the frame rate of a camera if motion is detected or if an event occurs Select the check box to enable increased frame rate on motion detection or on an external event then specify the required conditions in the following fields On motion Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 24 Administrator Application O
27. 4 4 With a 4 4 grid you will be able to display images from 16 cameras simultaneously in the camera layout 3 Assign cameras to the camera layout s camera slots as described in the following Assigning Cameras Having specified the required grid size for the camera layout assign cameras to the camera layout s camera slots the following way 4 Click the Database Information icon in the Viewer s toolbar This will open the Database Information control panel 2 Select a camera slot in the camera layout by clicking the required slot 3 In the Database Information control panel s Video Feed select the camera you want to assign to the selected slot An image from the selected camera will show up in the selected slot unless the selected time happens to be before the first recorded image from the camera Tip Your cameras may not all transfer images in a size that exactly matches the size of the camera layout s slots This may result in black bars around images from some cameras when displayed in the camera layout If you want to adjust the images from all cameras to fit the camera layout s camera slots select the Stretch Images To Fit check box in the Settings control panel This may distort some images slightly but will help you avoid any black bars around images 4 If audio is enabled you may also select an audio source from the Audio Feed list in which case recordings from the selected audio source will be coupled with recordings
28. 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 67 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Time btw transmissions Specify required minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each SMS alert per camera Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each SMS alert per camera even if motion is detected or events occur in between If specifying 0 SMS alerts will be sent each time motion is detected or events occur potentially resulting in a very large number of SMS alerts being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window Testing Your SMS Alert Configuration You are able to test your SMS alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test SMS to the specified recipients Note If the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available To make the button available do the following If the Monitor application is running shut it down If the Recording Server service is running pause it by clicking the Administrator window s Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Monitor application is shut down or the Recording Server service is paused Input Events amp Output Note Access to features in the Ad
29. 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 196 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc How does the NetGuard Differ from the NetGuard EVS For a description of how the NetGuard differs from theNetGuard EVS see Remote Access Overview Note Downloading and installation of the NetGuard may not be necessary The NetGuard may indeed be downloaded and installed locally on the remote user s computer but it may also be run directly from the NetDVR server If you choose to run the NetGuard directly from the NetDVR server you simply access it through the internet see Accessing the NetGuard When this is the case no downloading or installation is required The NetGuard may also be installed from a software CD Downloading and Installing the NetGuard If you wish to download and install the NetGuard do the following 1 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator in order to connect to the NetDVR server When you connect to the NetDVR server you will see a welcome page 2 In the NetGuard section of the welcome page click the Download and install NetGuard locally link 3 Depending on your security settings you may receive a security warning Do you want to run or save this file When this is the case click the Run button 4 Depending on your security settings you may receive a further security warning Do you want to run this softw
30. Background Cameras 122 Monitor Application 123 Image Bars 123 Hot Spot 124 Hot Spot with Carousel 124 Sending Live Images to a NetMatrix Monitor 125 Monitor How to 128 Viewer 130 Selecting Grid Size 132 Assigning Cameras
31. Camera Name window then click the Exit button in the Administrator window 5 Make sure NetDVR s recording server is running either as the Monitor application or as the recording server service Also make sure that the camera for which you configured the event notification is displayed in your Monitor NetGuard or NetGuard EVS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 106 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 6 In Windows Start menu select Run and type the following in the Open field If you are performing the test on the NetDVR server itself telnet localhost 1234 If you are performing the test from a remote computer Substitute localhost with the IP address of the NetDVR server Example If the IP address of the NetDVR server is 123 123 123 123 type telnet 123 123 123 123 1234 Note In the above examples the number 1234 indicates the port on which the NetDVR server listens for generic events Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose but it is possible to change this by specifying another port number in the Advanced window s Alert Port field If the alert port number has been changed on your system type your system s alert port number instead of 1234 This will open a Telnet window 7 In the Telnet window type the term so called event substring required to trigger your generic event In our case the require
32. Configure Device window in which you are able to configure image resolution compression etc for the camera Event Notifications The Event Notifications button opens the Setup Notifications on Events window in which you are able to select events for triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in the Monitor application NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your NetDVR system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Outputs The Outputs button opens the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify which outputs e g the sounding of a siren or the switching on of the lights should be associated with motion detection and or with output buttons for manually triggering output when the camera is selected in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS in the Monitor application and NetGuard 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 31 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Note The use of outputs requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your NetDVR system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera You specify output events in the I O
33. DLKs Lets you import all required Device License Keys DLKs in one go thus avoiding the need to specify each DLK manually when adding devices See also How to Import Device License Keys NetMatrix Lets you access NetMatrix configuration NetMatrix is an integrated product for forcing video from any camera to any monitor on a network operating with NetDVR Not applicable Add Device Starts the Device Setup Wizard which guides you through the process of adding a new device See also How to Add a Device Edit Device When you have selected a device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Edit Device button lets you edit settings for the selected device in the Edit device settings window Remove Device Lets you remove a device selected in the Administrator window s Device Manager section In order to prevent accidental removal of devices you will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the device Settings Lets you specify settings for a selected camera or audio source Cameras When you have selected a camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you specify camera settings Audio sources When you have selected an audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Audio Device Settings window
34. Decreases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Rx Increases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Ry Decreases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse Ry Increases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse X Moves the ellipse to the left X Moves the ellipse to the right Y Moves the ellipse up Y Moves the ellipse down 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 47 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Previewing the IPIX View You are able to toggle between previewing the fish eye view and the IPIX rendered view i e the original elliptic view as well as the flattened rectangular view resulting from applying the IPIX algorithm according to your specified values To toggle between the two different types of preview click the Toggle Preview button When previewing the IPIX rendered view the following navigation buttons become available for moving around within the preview image area Moves the IPIX rendered view up and to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view up Moves the IPIX rendered view up and to the right Moves the IPIX rendered view to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view to its home position Moves the IPIX rendered view to the right Moves the IPIX rendered view down and to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view down Moves the IPIX rendered view down and to the rig
35. Detected Motion You are able to combine a PTZ patrol scheme with motion detection so that when motion is detected the PTZ camera will pause its patrolling and remain at the position where motion was detected for a specified period of time To use this feature do the following 1 Select the Disable patrolling schedule if motion is detected check box 2 Select whether the PTZ camera should resume patrolling When a certain number of seconds has passed since first detection of motion regardless whether further motion is detected or When a certain number of seconds has passed without further detection of motion 3 Specify the required number of seconds for selected option Example You may specify that the PTZ camera should go to the next preset position and resume patrolling when 10 seconds has passed without detection of motion PTZ Scanning PTZ scanning is supported on a few devices only If your device supports PTZ scanning the Setup of PTZ Scanning section lets you enable PTZ scanning and select a PTZ scanning speed Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note Use of the IPIX technology requires a dedicated IPIX camera or a special IPIX camera lens with a special IPIX license key specified in the Edit Device Settings window IPIX is a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced fish e
36. Device window by clicking the Image Quality button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The Configure Device window is divided into a Camera Settings section and a preview image section Camera Settings Section The Camera Settings section will typically contain controls for compression bandwidth resolution color contrast brightness image rotation and similar Include Date and Time in Image The Camera Settings section may feature an Include Date and Time in Image check box When selected date and time from the camera will be included in images from the camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 32 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Note As cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc camera time and NetDVR system time may not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion As all images are time stamped by NetDVR upon reception and exact date and time information for each image is thus already known it is recommended that you keep the Include Date and Time in Image check box cleared Should you want to use the Include Date and Time in Image feature it is recommended that you click the Synchronize Time button if available Clicking the Synchronize Time button will set camera time to system time but does not guarantee that camera tim
37. Event message include field but may also have other content Event priority Specify a priority between 0 lowest priority and 1000 highest priority for the event in case a received data package matches more than one event Event rule string Specify what NetDVR should look out for when analyzing the data packages then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which is used when analyzing received data packages You are furthermore able to use processing order parentheses and two different Boolean operators in the Event message include field by clicking the buttons to the right of the field Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send Email if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 104 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the S
38. External output name Lets you specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 78 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device The Edit Output window Access You access the Edit Output window by selecting the required output in the I O Setup window then clicking the Edit selected button Edit Output Window s Fields The Edit Output window contains the following fields Field Description External output connected to Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event is defined Output connected on Lets you edit which of the device s output ports the output is connected to Keep output for Lets you edit the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in eith
39. Inc Views The way in which video from one or more cameras is displayed in the NetGuard EVS is called a view A view may contain video from up to 64 cameras depending on the surveillance system to which you connect A NetGuard EVS can handle an unlimited number of views allowing you to switch between video from various collections of cameras In order to help you maintain an easy overview when you navigate between various views in your NetGuard EVS all views are placed in folders called groups A group can contain any number of views and if required subgroups Difference between Private and Shared Views Views can be private or shared Private views can only be accessed by the user who created them Shared views allow many NetGuard EVS users to share the same views This is possible since all views are stored on the surveillance system server Depending on the type of surveillance system you connect to shared views can simply be shared by all NetGuard EVS users or access to selected shared views can be given to selected groups of NetGuard EVS users Before you create any views it is important that you are sure about the difference between private and shared views not least because a number of shared views may already exist in your organization If you already know that shared views exist and that you have access to them you can start using your NetGuard EVS straight away see Viewing Live Video and Viewing Recorded Video When
40. NetDVR Rev 6 0 NVR amp Camera Management Platform Installation and User Manual On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 U S A Phone 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Table of Contents Introductions 5 Included Components 5 Updates 6 Software Upgrade Plan SUP 6 Legal Notice 6 System Requirements 7 Administrator Application 11 Adding Devices
41. Note Depending on your user rights access to triggering outputs for some cameras may be restricted To trigger an output first select the required camera in the view then select the required output in the Output Control section and click the Fire link PTZ Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images cameras can be controlled from the NetGuard Note Depending on your user rights access to PTZ controls from some cameras may be restricted Point and Click Control Many PTZ cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and clicking inside the images from the camera If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the images from a PTZ camera point and click control is supported for the camera Crosshairs indicate point and click control For some cameras crosshairs may look different For some cameras crosshairs surrounded by a square may be displayed When this is the case you are able to zoom in on an area by dragging a square around the required area in the image For such cameras zoom level is controlled by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down this will display a zoom level slider inside the image PTZ Navigation Buttons Alternatively use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move the selected PTZ or IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e defa
42. PTZ menu is only functional when the camera selected in the camera layout is a PTZ camera Use of the PTZ menu may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button See a detailed description of the PTZ menu in How to Use the PTZ Menu Tip To hide the PTZ menu simply click the PTZ Menu button again Manual Mode Lets you toggle between scheduled mode cameras transferring images to NetDVR according to a schedule defined in the Administrator application and manual mode With manual mode you can start a camera i e make it transfer images to NetDVR from the Monitor even if the camera is not scheduled to be online When manual mode is selected Manual Mode button depressed three buttons the Stop Start button the Start All button and the Stop All button become available enabling you to start and stop cameras manually Note When in manual mode all scheduled camera activity for all cameras including automatic reconnection and any scheduled PTZ patrolling is disabled Use of manual mode may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button Stop or Start Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Stops the camera selected in the camera layout When stopped no images are transferred from the camera to NetDVR 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 125 Monitor Application On Net Surveill
43. SMTP server which will be used for sending the e mail alerts Server requires login Select check box if a user name and password is required to use the SMTP server Username Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the user name required for using the SMTP server Password Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the password required for using the SMTP server Specifying Default Subject and Message Texts Specify default subject and message texts in the following fields Subject text Specify required subject text for e mail alerts Message text Specify required message text for e mail alerts Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in e mail alerts Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Subject text and Message text fields will appear as default values in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite these default values Specifying Image and Interval Options You are able to specify whether e mail alerts should include images and how much time should pass between alerts per camera Include Image Select check box to include images in e mail alerts When selected a JPG image from the time the triggering event occurred will be attached to each alert e mail Time btw mails minutes Specify required minimum time in mi
44. Settings for Device Name window is divided into a P T Z Camera Selection section and a camera list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 21 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc P T Z Camera Selection Section The P T Z Camera selection section contains the following fields Field Description Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Select check box if any of the cameras attached to the video server device is a PTZ camera If the check box is not available PTZ is not supported for the device in question P T Z type controlled through COM1 Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selected If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM1 port on the video server device select the required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM1 port select None P T Z type controlled through COM2 Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selected If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM2 port on the video server device select the required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM2 port select None Camera List and Fields The camera list contains a line for each camera channel on the device First line from the top corr
45. Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window PTZ Preset Positions PTZ cameras only Available only if the camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions button opens PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify preset positions and patrolling for the camera Note If the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available To make the button available do the following If the Monitor application is running shut it down If the Recording Server service is running pause it by clicking the Administrator window s Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Monitor application is shut down or the Recording Server service is paused Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note Settings in the Configure Device window are to a large extent camera specific The window s contents will therefore vary from camera to camera descriptions in the following are thus for guidance only The Configure Device window lets you specify image quality settings such as compression resolution etc for a specific camera Example of the Configure Device window with a preview image Access You access the Configure
46. You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requires that output has been defined in the I O Setup window You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the NetDVR system The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually through output buttons in the Monitor application or from a list in the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Output buttons will become available in the Monitor when the camera is selected and the Monitor s Output button is clicked In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to trigger outputs by selecting them from a list To specify an output for manual triggering in the Monitor or NetGuard NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Tip Whe
47. You are able to create five categories of buttons on the HTML page Buttons for switching between the NetGuard client s views Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top changeView Groupname Viewname gt Buttons for switching between the NetGuard client s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Bear in mind that depending on their user rights some users may not be able to access all three tabs Required HTML syntax Live tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane live gt Browse tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane browse Setup tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane setup gt Buttons for hiding showing the NetGuard client s standard navigation pane Required HTML syntax Hiding lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showPane false gt Showing lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showPane true gt Buttons for hiding showing the NetGuard client s standard title bar Required HTML syntax Hiding lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showTopTitle false gt Showing lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showTopTitle true gt Buttons for switching to a particular point in time in the Browse tab s time navigation Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top setTime M
48. a less obscured view of the preview image Selection of areas in which motion detection should be disabled takes place the same way as when the grid is visible Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Select Color window lets you select between three colors to be used for highlighting areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Color changes only have effect in the Monitor application the default blue highlight color will always be used in the Administrator application Access You access the Select Color window by clicking the Region Color button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Highlighting of areas with disabled motion detection in the Monitor application requires that the Show Regions check box in the Camera Monitor Setup section of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is selected Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the I O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as
49. also able to select all cameras on a server in one go by selecting the check box next to the server icon The sequence in which cameras will appear in the carousel is automatically determined by their names which are typically made up along the structure Device name Camera name The cameras will appear in alphabetical order even if you select cameras from more than one server then loop continuously When you have selected cameras specify the carousel s other properties which are Image Quality Select between Full default SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the carousel Select between Unlimited default Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 167 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The effect of your selection can be illustrated by the following table Effect Unlimited Medium Low JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame MPEG IFrame Send all frames Send all frames Send all frames MPEG PFrame Send all frames Do not send any frames Do not send any frames Example If you set the Frame Rate option to Low in your NetGuard EVS and your surveillance system administrator has configured a
50. and thus share the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video server devices You can of course configure and use each camera individually even when several cameras are attached to a single device In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video server devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to NetDVR When such I O devices are added they can be used in events based system setup in the same way as a camera For more information about using I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note Once a device is added in NetDVR any cameras attached to the device are automatically recognized by the software and listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached To add a device use the following procedure Prerequisites You must have configured IP address password etc on the device itself as described by the manufacturer 1 Open the Administrator window 2 In the Administrator window click the Add Device button This will start the Device Setup Wizard 3 On the first step of the wizard identify the required device either by Typing the IP address of the device Tip To jump
51. are deleted Default is ten days Tip Read more about logging in About Logging Timeout for connections Lets you specify a number of minutes within which the remote user must have been active requested information from the Web Server in order to keep the connection open If the remote user has not been active within the specified time the connection will be closed and the remote user will have to log in again if more information is required from the Web Server Default period is five minutes Realtime feed quality Note This setting specifically concerns the RealtimeFeed Server Lets you specify the default image quality used by the RealtimeFeed Server Low Low image quality Recommended for slow connections such as modem connections Medium Medium image quality Recommended for connections of reasonable speed such as ISDN connections High High image quality Recommended for fast connections such as ADSL or LAN connections Remote users will be able to manually override the RealtimeFeed Server s default image quality 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 222 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Administration Accounts and access rights for remote users are configured in the Settings window s User Administration section Unrestricted anonymous remote access is possible however if you want to res
52. areas excluded from the search Motion in Image Select check box to highlight found motion in images 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 137 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Digital Image Control and Optimization With the Viewer s Image Controls control panel you are able to adjust the image selected in the camera layout The Image Controls control panel also lets you view areas of the selected image in greater magnification To access the Image Controls control panel click the Image Controls icon in the toolbar Image Controls icon Image Controls control panel De interlacing Interlacing is a method determining how an image is refreshed when shown on a screen With interlacing the image is refreshed by first scanning every other line in the image then scanning every opposite line and so forth This allows for a faster refresh rate because less information must be processed during each scan However in some situations interlacing may cause flickering or the changes in only half of the image s lines for each scan may be noticeable If images from the selected camera are interlaced you are able to de interlace the image by viewing only odd or even lines in the image Zoom Controls With the zoom controls you are able to view areas of the selected image in greater magnification Use the large zoom in and zoom ou
53. be different on your computer 8 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 9 Select required frame rate for the export With the Full option all images between the start and end times will be included in the export with the Half option only every second image will be included yet still play back in real time 9 If you used digital zoom on the camera s images before exporting you are able to export the digitally zoomed images rather than the regular images Select Yes if you want to export the digitally zoomed images select No if you want to export the camera s regular non zoomed images If you did not use digital zoom before exporting this option will not be available 10 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 In the AVI Codec list select required AVI codec The list will contain the video codecs available on your PC Tip A video codec is a particular compression decompression technology used when generating video files Your choice of codec will affect the quality and size of the AVI file The Indeo video 5 10 codec if available on your PC generally provides a very good compromise between quality and file size 11 Specify export destination in the export dialog s Export Destination section Desktop If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of you
54. camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames per second you will experience an average of 1 frame per second when viewing video from the camera in the carousel If your administrator had configured a camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second you would with Frame Rate set to Low in your NetGuard EVS experience an average of 0 2 frames per second when viewing video from the camera in the carousel Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the carousel this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel Interval seconds Specify the interval between the carousel s camera changes The setting will apply for changes between all the cameras included in the carousel it is not possible to specify particular intervals for changes between particular cameras Tip You are able to use several carousels in a single view Adding Hotspots With a hotspot users will be able to select a camera in the view and view enlarged and or higher quality images from the selected camera in the view s hotspot For the hotspot you would usually select a one of the view s larger positions for
55. cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want to use specific alerts or a PTZ patrol scheme General Settings Opens the General Settings window in which you are able to specify a number of settings related to Administrator password User rights PTZ patrolling pause time out if using PTZ cameras with patrolling Joystick setup for PTZ cameras E mail settings for alerts sent via e mail SMS settings for alerts sent via SMS Log file settings Event recording settings 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 14 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Other advanced settings such as the ability to disable screen update in order to minimize CPU usage Installation dependent feature Note that some of the settings are only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service some of the features are not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Archive Setup Opens theArchive setup window in which you specify NetDVR s archiving settings Archiving lets you keep recordings for as long as required limited only be the available hardware storage capacity Import
56. check box then select the features to which users who are not administrators should have access Installation dependent features The ability to restrict users access to the Monitor application is available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service the ability to restrict users rights is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Application Startup Allows users to start the Monitor application without having to specify the Administrator password Application Shutdown Allows users to close the Monitor application Manual Control Allows users to start and stop cameras manually in the Monitor application Start Administrator from Monitor Allows users to open the Administrator application from the Monitor application without having to specify the administrator password Browser Allows users to start the Viewer feature in the Monitor application The Viewer lets users browse stored images export images etc PTZ Control Allows users to use the Monitor application s PTZ Menu with Pan Tilt Zoom controls for installed PTZ cameras Quick Browse Allows users to use the Monitor application s Quick Browse buttons for browsing newly stored images Note that use of the Quick Browse buttons requires that a Hot Spot is enabled in
57. defined on your NetDVR system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 113 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button This will open the Add New Output window 3 In the Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names
58. easily integrate your NetDVR surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events NetDVR listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 The Generic Events window lets you manage such events The Generic Events window Access You access the Generic Events window by clicking the Generic Events button in the Administrator window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 85 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Generic Events Window s Events List and Buttons The Generic Events window features a Defined events list in which defined TCP and or UDP based events are listed as well a number of buttons used when configuring the events Button Description Add new event Lets you define new events The type of event you are able to define is determined by what you have selected in the Defined events list When nothing is selected or you have selected the list s Generic item clicking the Add new event button will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events in which you are able to specify the rules and notification settings for individual TCP and or UDP based events When an existi
59. example the large position in a 1 7 view Advantages of Using a Hotspot The fact that you can view enlarged images in the hotspot is not in itself what makes the hotspot useful you can enlarge any image in a view by double clicking the image What makes the hotspot useful is that with a hot spot you can use a low image quality and or frame rate for cameras in the view s regular positions and a high image quality and or frame rate for the hot spot Then only when users select a camera for viewing in the hotspot will it be displayed in high quality and or high frame rate This can really help you save bandwidth on the remote connection Adding the Hotspot To add a hotspot to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Hotspot link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position Tip Note that the position gets a thin orange border The orange border indicates that the position is used for a hotspot the orange border will also be evident when using the view on the Browse and Live tabs 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 168 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Thin orange border indicates hotspot 3 When the hotspot position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section Image Quality Select between Full
60. export dialog will list the specified start time end time and camera 6 In the export dialog select the required export format AVI movie clip or JPEG still images 7 Select whether to add timestamps from the surveillance system to the exported images If selected timestamps will appear in the corner of the images Timestamps arrow indicates actual position Date and time format may be different on your computer 8 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 Select required frame rate for the export With the Full option all images between the start and end times will be included in the export with the Half option only every second image will be included yet still play back in real time 9 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 In the AVI Codec list select required AVI codec The list will contain the video codecs available on your PC Tip A video codec is a particular compression decompression technology used when generating video files Your choice of codec will affect the quality and size of the AVI file The Indeo video 5 10 codec if available on your PC generally provides a very good compromise between quality and file size 10 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 By default the AVI file will get a file name based on the export start time along the structure y
61. features a Device Manager section as well as a number of buttons providing access to configuration Device Manager Section The Device Manager section located in the middle of the Administrator window lists all added devices and attached cameras The Device Manager section thus provides you with an overview of your surveillance system Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 11 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Until you have added devices the Device Manager section will be empty Adding Devices You add devices through an intuitive Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Administrator window s Add Device button see also How to Add a Device When devices have been added they will be listed in the Device Manager section Clicking the plus sign next to a device in the Device Manager section will list cameras attached to the device Editing Settings for Devices To edit settings for a device listed in the Device Manager section select the device then click the Edit device button to open the Edit device settings window Editing Settings for Cameras To edit the settings for a camera listed in the Device Manager section
62. fields Field Description Button related to Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the event button has been specified If the field displays Global the event button is a global event button available for all cameras Manual event name Lets you edit the name of the event button Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is clicked Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is clicked Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Generic Events Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights NetDVR is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to
63. for individual cameras To adjust a camera s properties select the required camera in the view the selected position will be indicated by a bold border then make the adjustments in the Properties section Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab Camera Name The Camera Name field displays the name of the selected camera The field is read only Image Quality The Image Quality setting determines the quality of the images when viewed but also affects bandwidth usage If the NetGuard EVS is used over the internet over a slow network connection or if for other reasons you need to limit bandwidth use image quality can be reduced on the server side by selecting e g Low or Medium Tip You can quickly reduce the bandwidth usage for all cameras in the view by reducing the image quality for a single camera then clicking the Apply To All button Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the selected camera Select between Unlimited default Medium or Low The effect of your selection can be illustrated by the following table Effect Unlimited Medium Low JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame MPEG IFrame Send all frames Send all frames Send all frames MPEG PFrame Send all frames Do not send any frames Do not send any frames Example If you set the Frame Rate option to Low in your NetGuard EVS and your surveillance system administrator has configu
64. from the selected camera 5 Repeat for all cameras you want displayed in the camera layout Image Bars Each camera slot in the camera layout is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera slot 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 132 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the camera layout the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue Camera slot enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar also features two colored indicators Motion indicator the left indicator red Lights up during periods of motion Online indicator the right indicator green Lights up during periods with recordings Storing and Recalling Views You are able to save particular configurations of the camera layout as so called views and switch between them using the Views menu in the Viewer s menu bar For example you may store one view displaying images from 16 cameras and another view displaying images from eight other cameras See How to Store and Recall Views Browsing Recordings with the Time amp Date Selector Using the time amp date s
65. has a NetGuard EVS installed provided you log in to the NetGuard EVS with your own user name and password Deleting a Shortcut Key Combination To delete an existing keyboard shortcut from the Assigned keys list simply select the unwanted shortcut in the list then click the Delete button In the NetGuard EVS you are able to select between several language versions To select a language do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS client s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Language then the required language 3 The NetGuard EVS must be restarted in order for the change to take effect Close your NetGuard EVS then log in again to use the new language version In addition to displaying images from cameras the NetGuard EVS is able to display static images and HTML pages Such HTML pages may be used for intuitively switching between different views in the NetGuard EVS For example you may insert a clickable floor plan of a building and you would be able to simply click a part of the floor plan to instantly switch to a view displaying images from the required part of the building In the following you will see examples of HTML pages for NetGuard EVS navigation a simple HTML page with buttons and a more advanced HTML page with a clickable image map For surveillance system administrators wishing to create and distribute such HTML pages to NetGuard EVS users a check list outlining
66. if in doubt about whether it is safe to use this feature Auto login If selected you will automatically be logged in to the NetGuard EVS when you log in to Windows If using Windows authentication the Remember password check box must be selected in order for the auto login feature to be available Note Depending on your type of organization and work environment security restrictions may apply Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about whether it is safe to use this feature When ready click Connect Tip If a problem or other issue occurs during login you will receive an error message see Login Error Messages for more information 5 Only relevant if you have logged in before if logging in for the first time move to step 6 The NetGuard EVS will ask you if you want to keep the view s you last used Your options are Main View If the check box is selected the view you last used in the NetGuard EVS client s main window will be restored If check box is cleared no view will initially be displayed in which case you must select the required view yourself Detached Views Available only if you used views in primary display on secondary displays or in floating windows the last time you were logged in on the computer in question see Using Multiple Windows for more information If check box is selected the views you last sent to primary display secondary displays and floating windows will be restor
67. in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The New Timer window lets you specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes The New Timer window Access You are able to access the New Timer window in three ways If dealing with input and VMD events in the I O Setup window When you click the plus sign next to a device in the window s Defined events list and select a defined event you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window If dealing with event buttons in the Event Buttons window When selecting an already specified event button in the Defined Events list you are able to click the A
68. in which you can enable disable the audio source and change its name if required I O Setup Opens the I O Setup window in which you are able to define events based on input events for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened and VMD Video Motion Detection The I O Setup window also lets you specify output e g a siren When defined events can be used for a variety of purposes For example an input event can be used for triggering output for starting a particular camera and for triggering that an e mail or SMS message is sent to a particular user notifying the user of the recorded event 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 15 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc See also the description of the I O Control button Event Buttons Opens the Event Buttons window in which you are able to define events for use on event buttons Event buttons can used in the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS for manually triggering events Generic Events Opens the Generic Events window in which you are able to define events based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols I O Control Opens the I O Control window in which you are able to attach outputs to input events This way you can for example define that a siren should sound when a sensor detects that a door is opened Exit
69. keypad only PTZ camera move down and right 5 numeric keypad only PTZ camera move to default position On Browse Tab Only RIGHT ARROW Move to next image LEFT ARROW Move to previous image PAGE DOWN Move to next sequence PAGE UP Move to previous sequence HOME Move to first image END Move to last image In addition to displaying images from cameras the NetGuard is able to display static images and HTML pages Such HTML pages may be used for intuitively switching between different views in the NetGuard For example you may insert a clickable floor plan of a building and you would be able to simply click a part of the floor plan to instantly switch to a view displaying images from the required part of the building In the following you will see examples of HTML pages for NetGuard navigation a simple HTML page with buttons and a more advanced HTML page with a clickable image map For NetDVR system administrators wishing to create and distribute such HTML pages to NetGuard users a check list outlining the tasks involved is also provided Note The method described here requires a locally installed version of the NetGuard 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 216 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example of an HTML Page with Button Navigation A very quick solution is to create an HTML page with buttons for navigation
70. last few previously received video streams in your view as well The positions ranking is applied automatically the first NetMatrix position you add to the view will automatically be the view s primary NetMatrix position the next one you add will automatically be the 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 171 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc secondary one etc If required you can manually change the NetMatrix positions ranking in the Setup tab s Properties section To add NetMatrix content to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s NetMatrix link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position Tip Note that the position gets a thin blue border The blue border indicates that the position is used for NetMatrix content the blue border will also be evident when using the view on the Browse and Live tabs Thin blue border indicates NetMatrix 3 When the NetMatrix position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section Image Quality Select between Full the default setting SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the NetMatrix position Select between Unlimited default Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in
71. lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images The setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the hotspot Adding Static Images Static images can be used in views for a variety of purposes for company logos for including floor plans or maps in the view for including photos of wanted persons etc To add a static image to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Image link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position When you release the mouse button you are able to select the required static image file 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 169 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Adding HTML Pages Static images can be used in views for a variety of purposes for including company web pages navigation pages online map services link collections e learning pages etc Tip When an imported HTML page contains links it is highly recommended that the links have the target blank attribute example lt a href otherwebpage htm target blank gt Link lt a gt This will make the links open in separate windows which will help you avoid losing view of the NetGuard EVS window itself due to a link opening a web page in the same browser window as the NetGuard EVS To add an HTML page to a view
72. left of a cursor positioned in the Event message include field If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field the last item in the field will be removed Notification Settings Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields in the Notification settings section Field Description Send Email if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When you have specified a new generic event click OK Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit Event window for editing generic events lets you edit the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to edit the criteria according
73. log in again 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 149 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Administration Section Accounts and rights for NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are configured in the ImageServer Administrator window s User Administration section NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users must be defined in this section in order to be able to log in to the surveillance system Defining Users To define NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users click the User Setup button This will open the User administration window in which you define users Defining User Access Rights Once you have defined users you are able to define whether all users should have access to all NetGuard NetGuard EVS features and all available cameras or whether access should be restricted by user Full Access for All Users To give all users access to all NetGuard NetGuard EVS features and all available cameras select Full access for all users Restricted Access To use restricted access select Restrict user access Then click the User Access button to open the Define User Rights window in which you define access rights for each user Log Files Section In the Log Files section specify the number of days to keep log files in the Image Server s regular event log By default such log files are kept for ten days before they are deleted Tip Read more about Ne
74. movie clip and JPEG still image formats View HTML pages and static images which may be used for intuitively switching between different views in the NetGuard How does the NetGuard get Images from the Surveillance System Images viewed by NetGuard users are provided by the Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the NetDVR server it does not require separate hardware The NetDVR system administrator uses the Image Server Administrator to manage NetGuard clients access to the surveillance system How can User Rights Affect Use of the NetGuard The rights of individual remote users are specified centrally by the surveillance system administrator The rights of an individual user will determine the user s ability to use the NetGuard client s features Basically the surveillance system administrator is able to restrict a user s rights to the following Access to the NetGuard Access to each of the NetGuard client s tabs Live Browse and Setup Ability to use features on the NetGuard client s tabs Ability to create views views determine the way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed Ability to view images from specific cameras The ability to use various features of the NetGuard may therefore vary considerably from user to user Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369
75. must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered Tip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 114 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 In the Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 115 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 In the All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output t
76. page 232 Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages Log files are subjected to an integrity check once every 24 hours The result of the integrity check is automatically written to a file named according to the structure LogCheck_YYYYMMDD log e g LogCheck_20061231 log The log check file is by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVR software Any inconsistencies will be reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file The following table lists possible error messages other non error messages may also appear in the log check file Error Message Description Log integrity information was not found Log integrity can t be guaranteed The log file could not be checked for integrity Log information does not match integrity information Log integrity can t be guaranteed The log file exists but does not contain the expected information Thus log integrity cannot be guaranteed Log file name not found The log file was not present Log file name is empty The log file was present but empty Last line changed removed in log file name The last line of the log file did not match validation criteria Encrypted data missing in log file name near line The encrypted part of the log line in question was not present Inconsistency found in log file name near line The log line does not match the encrypted part Inco
77. reached o What to do If possible wait for a while before connecting again If access to the surveillance system is urgent contact your surveillance system administrator who may be able to extend the allowed number of simultaneously connected clients New Client Available Update is recommended required The new version can be downloaded from o Issue A new version of the NetGuard EVS is available This message is typically accompanied by information about whether an update is recommended or whether it is a requirement for example due to recently introduced features not working in your current NetGuard EVS version The message will typically also contain information about where to download the new version from o What to do Follow the advice given in the message Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt In the NetGuard EVS you are able to select between several language versions To select a language do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS client s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Language then the required language 3 The NetGuard EVS must be restarted in order for the change to take effect Close your NetGuard EVS then log in again to use the new language version 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 160 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems
78. simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in images from the camera Tip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in images from the camera 3 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 37 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 4 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may req
79. system for remote users logging in with the NetGuard NetGuard EVS or NetPDA NetCell Client The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server Surveillance system administrators handle Image Server configuration including remote users access rights through the Image Server Administrator application The NetGuard and NetGuard EVS Choice of two types of remote access clients each providing users with intuitive remote access to the surveillance system The NetGuard and NetGuard EVS let users view live images play back recorded images activate outputs print and export evidence etc The NetGuard lets users view live images play back recorded images activate outputs print and export evidence etc The NetGuard can be downloaded from the surveillance system server and installed locally on remote users PCs or the users can access it straight from the surveillance system server through an Internet Explorer browser The extra feature rich NetGuard EVS should always be downloaded and installed on remote users PCs The Web Server and Realtime Feed Server Simple alternatives to the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS for providing remote access to the surveillance system the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server let system administrators manage remote access Remote users access the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server through an Internet Explorer browser The NetPDA NetCell Cl
80. the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Installation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service If the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application the Service Manager window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Service Manager window lets you pause resume the Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features such as configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Access You access the Service Manager window by clicking the Service Manager button in the Administrator window Note that the button is only available when the recording server has been installed as a service Pausing the Recording Server Service To pause the Recording Server service click the Pause button IMPORTANT While the service is paused no video or audio will be recorded 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 52 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Resuming the Recording Server Service When the service is paused the Service Manager window closes The next time you open it the Pause button will have changed to Resume Simply click the Resume button to resume the Recor
81. the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Overview browsing is based on thumbnail image representations 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 228 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc of the sequences Clicking the left arrow provides you with an overview of the previous four sequences in which motion was detected with information about each sequence You are able to jump to a sequence by clicking the thumbnail image representing it Example of overview Likewise clicking the right button provides you with an overview of the next four sequences in which motion was detected with information about each sequence You are able to jump to a sequence by clicking the thumbnail image representing it Clicking the Overview link lets you browse the four sequence overviews For each click you are taken forward in time Alarms Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Alarms browsing is based on a list of the sequences Clicking the left arrow lets you browse back in time in a list of sequences in which motion was detected The list displays information about start time first motion detection alarm time and end time for each sequence By clicking the list s links you are able to jump to the images matching each sequence s start time first motion dete
82. the tasks involved is also provided Tip The NetGuard EVS is highly flexible when it comes to customizing navigation and other features For advanced users it is possible to create approximately 100 different function calls in the NetGuard EVS See NetGuard EVS Scripting for more information 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 179 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example of an HTML Page with Button Navigation A very quick solution is to create an HTML page with buttons for navigation You are able to create a wide variety of buttons on the HTML page In this example we will just create two types of buttons Buttons for switching between the NetGuard EVS client s views Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Views SelectView Viewstatus Groupname Viewname gt Where Viewstatus indicates whether the view is shared or private if the HTML page is to be distributed to several users the view must be shared Example from a real button lt input type button value Go to Shared Group1 View2 onclick SCS Views SelectView Shared Group1 View2 gt This button would allow users to go to a view called View2 in a shared group called Group1 Buttons for switching between the NetGuard EVS client s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Bear in mind that depending on their user rights some user
83. to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard or Typing the DNS host name of the device This requires that you select the Use DNS host names box 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 17 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Specifying the IP address of a device Note By default HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 will be used for the device If the device you are adding uses other port numbers click the Port Setup button and specify required port numbers The need for specifying different ports may often apply if the device is located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the ports and IP address used by the device When ready click Next to go to the second step of the wizard 4 If a password is used for the device type the password for the device s administrator account called an admin or root account on some devices Leave the Autodetect Device option selected Click Next 5 When the device has been detected type the Device License Key DLK for the device in the DLK field Specifying DLK for the device Tip If you have imported DLKs see How to Import Device License Keys the DLK field will already be filled with the DLK for the device Click Next 6 Assign a unique and descriptive name
84. triggered by events the timer event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVR Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually when viewing live video in the Monitor as well as the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS In the Monitor the output can be triggered by first selecting a camera for which manual output has been defined then clicking the Monitor s Output button which provides access to up to eight buttons representing the defined output Clicking the required button will trigger the output In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS the output is triggered by selecting the required output from a list on the client s Live tab The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which Monitor and NetGuard NetGuard EVS view live video the output can be connected to any device on your NetDVR system 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 109 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To add an output for manual control do the following Note In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not
85. viewed image is the first stored image Clicking the right arrow will take you to the next image in which motion was detected unless the currently viewed image is the last stored image Tip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Sequence Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the left arrow will take you to the previous sequence If motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in which motion was detected within the sequence If no motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in the sequence Clicking the right arrow will take you to the next sequence If motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in which motion was detected within the sequence If no motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in the sequence Tip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature End Lets you quickly jump to the oldest or newest image from the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the left arrow will take you to the oldest image in the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the right arrow will take you to the newest image in the recent database of the selected camera Tip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Overview Lets you browse sequences from
86. when defined events occur for example when motion is detected or when another user wishes to share important live images Provided NetMatrix has been configured on the surveillance system server you are able to include NetMatrix content in your NetGuard EVS views Thus when particular events occur or another user wishes to share important occurrences with you live images from particular cameras will automatically appear in your views NetMatrix positions Which events or cameras are used in the NetMatrix setup depends entirely on the surveillance system server s NetMatrix configuration or on what other users wish to share with you you are not able to control this in the NetGuard EVS However you are able to add NetMatrix content to as many view positions as required This way you are able to watch live video from several NetMatrix triggered sources at the same time If you create a view with several NetMatrix positions the positions are always ranked When the first video stream is received NetMatrix automatically presents the video stream in the primary NetMatrix position in your view When the next video stream is received a first in first out principle begins to apply NetMatrix quickly transfers the previously received video stream to your view s secondary NetMatrix position and presents the latest video stream in your view s primary NetMatrix position and so on This way you can always watch the latest video stream while maintaining the
87. when the event button is clicked Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is clicked Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit Event window for editing event buttons lets you edit the settings for an existing event button The Edit Event window for editing input events Access You access the Edit Event window for editing event buttons from the Event Buttons window by first selecting the required event button in the Defined Events list then clicking the Edit selected button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 84 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing event buttons contains the following
88. you specify which cameras to include in the Monitor application It also lets you configure the layout of the Monitor application Monitor Manager window Access You access the Monitor Manager window by clicking the Monitor Manager button in the Administrator window Note that the button is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application The Monitor Manager window features a Layout Size list as well as a Configuration section Layout Size List In the Layout Size list you select the required grid for use in the Monitor application s camera layout Options are 1 1 2 2 3 3 etc up to an 8 8 grid A 3 3 camera layout grid for example will allow display of up to 9 cameras Selecting a 3 3 camera layout grid 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 50 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Configuration Section In the Monitor Manager window s Configuration section you select which cameras to display in the camera layout grid You also select whether the Monitor s hot spot and carousel features should be enabled Feature Description Select Camera Lets you select a particular camera for use in a particular position in the camera layout grid Select a position in the camera layout grid then select a camera from the list to display images from the selected camera in the selected positio
89. 0901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 182 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Viewing a List of Possible Function Calls To view a list of the approximately 100 different function calls you are able to use in the NetGuard EVS do the following on the NetGuard EVS client s Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to a position in a view Tip Preferably use a 1 1 view this will give you the best possible overview of the list s content When you release the mouse button over the required position the Open URL window opens Open URL window 2 In the Open URL window s Open field type about script and click OK This will display the list of function calls Each function call will be listed with a short description of its purpose and you will be able to try out many of the function calls straight from the list Startup Scripting It is possible to use scripting to control parts or all of the NetGuard EVS login procedure Examples If using the authentication methods Basic authentication or Windows authentication you can make the NetGuard EVS login dialog open with pre filled Server address and User name fields in which case the user merely has to enter a password in order to log in If using the authentication method Windows authentication current user you can make the NetGuard EVS connect to the surveillance system automatically based on
90. 1 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 226 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 3 Click the browser s Go button or simply press the ENTER key on your keyboard to go to the IP address you have specified When the connection to the Web Server has been successfully established a login page will appear 4 Access to the Web Server is likely to be restricted When this is the case specify your user name and password 5 If you want to be able to view live images or to be able to browse recorded images select the ActiveX support check box 6 Click the Login button 7 A web page with a menu for selecting cameras navigating images etc will appear Example of remote viewing of images from a surveillance camera The menu is divide into three sections Single View light yellow background Quad View purple background and Help green background The features available in each menu section are described in the following Single View The Single View menu section is used for handling images from a single camera at a time The following features are available in the Single View menu section Feature Description Select Camera Lets you select a camera Selection is based either on a simple list of cameras or on a graphic representation of the NetDVR surveillance system s Monitor application When the graphic representation is use
91. 22 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 59 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Event Recording Settings As opposed to the general log files which contain information about activity on the surveillance system itself event log files contain information about registered events for more information about events see About Input Events amp Output The Event Recording Settings section lets you specify where to keep event log files and how long for Event log files should be viewed using the Monitor application s Viewer or the NetGuard EVS Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log NetGuard EVS In the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected Path By default event log files are stored in the folder containing the NetDVR software To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Keep A new event log file is created every day Event log files older than the number of days specified in the Days to keep field are automatically deleted By default event log files will be stored for five days To specify another number of da
92. 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 27 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc and or specified events Using such a pre post buffer can be advantageous If for example you have defined that images should be stored when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be important Specify the number of seconds for which you want to store images from before and after the storage conditions are met Example You have specified that images should be stored conditionally on event with a start event called Door Opened and a stop event called Door Closed With a pre post buffer of three seconds images will be stored from three seconds before Door Opened occurs to three seconds after Door Closed occurs Note Pre post recording periods cannot be displayed in the timelines of the NetGuard EVS s timeline browser The fact that these periods cannot be displayed in the timeline browser s timelines does not affect recording iPIX Note Functionality in the iPIX section is only available if the use of IPIX technology has been enabled for the device to which the camera is attached For dedicated IPIX cameras the use of IPIX technology is automatically enabled If not dealing with a dedicated IPIX camera you enable use of IPIX technology for a device in the Edit device settings window accessed
93. 400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 107 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To define a timer event do the following 1 A timer event requires that an input event VMD event generic event or event button has already been defined Begin by selecting the required event or event button If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event Click the Administrator window s I O Setup button to open the I O Setup window In the I O Setup window s Defined events list click the plus sign next to the required device select the required input or VMD event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Button Click the Administrator window s Event Buttons button to open the Event Buttons window In the Event Buttons window s Defined Events list select the required event button then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Generic Event Click the Administrator window s Generic Events button to open the Generic Events window In the Generic Events window s Defined Events list select the required generic event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window 2 In the New Timer window the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the selected event or event button Now
94. 9 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 69 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Input and VMD events can be used for triggering outputs or for triggering various actions on the surveillance system itself such as for starting or stopping cameras configured in the Camera Alert Scheduler window or for moving a PTZ camera to a particular preset position configured in the Event window for PTZ preset positions on event Once you have defined input events VMD events and outputs you are able to associate specific input events or VMD events with specific outputs in the I O Control window so that for example lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected on a camera Outputs may also be triggered by motion detection on a specific camera even without a defined VMD event or manually through output buttons in the Monitor application both are configured in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The I O Setup window Access You access the I O Setup window by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window Note Before you specify inputs and outputs for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check NetDVR release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and f
95. 9 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 86 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Access You access the Add New Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window by clicking the Add new event button The Add New Event window for specifying generic events is divided into three sections General Event Settings Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields in the General Event settings section Field Description Event Name Lets you specify a name for the event Each event must have a unique name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Event Protocol Lets you select which protocol NetDVR should listen for in order to detect the event Any Listen for and analyze packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol TCP Listen for and analyze packages using TCP protocol only UDP Listen for and analyze packages using UDP protocol only Which port is used NetDVR listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 Event rule type Lets you select how particular NetDVR should be when analyzing received data packages Match In order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field and not
96. Buttons for examples of the many ways in which you can use event buttons To add an event button do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the Event Buttons button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 99 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc This will open the Event Buttons window 2 In the Event Buttons window first select the camera or other device for which you want the event button to be available then click the Add new event button Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available i e available to users regardless of which camera device they have selected in the Monitor or NetGuard EVS To make the event button globally available simply select Global at the top of the list instead of a particular camera device This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons 3 In the Add New Event window for adding event buttons the Button related to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device If you are adding a globally available event button the field will display Global Now specify information in the following fields Manual event name Specify a name for the event button Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Tip If intending to use the event button in the Monitor applicatio
97. Closes the Administrator application Tip Clicking the icon in the left corner of the Administrator window s title bar gives you access to a small menu Selecting About Adm from the menu will display a dialog with your system s version number and software license code this is valuable information should you ever need to contact product support Import of DLKs Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights You must have a Device License Key DLK for every device IP network camera or IP video server installed on your NetDVR surveillance system Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number of cameras listed on your organization s license sheet regardless of you number of available DLKs For example a fully used four port video server counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a single device therefore a fully used four port video server will use four licenses System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process You are able to specify each DLK manually when adding a device through the Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Add Device button in the Administrator window However you can avoid having to specify each DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into NetDVR in one go Prerequisites The DLKs received in a dlk file must have
98. EVS access through the ImageServer Due to the way the software has been developed the NetGuard EVS offers a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer Do you require a very feature rich client application Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer The NetGuard EVS offers more features for remote users than the other solutions No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer Do you require a large amount of flexibility remote users ability to export data Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer The NetGuard EVS offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI movie clip JPEG still image as well as NetDVR database formats No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer or regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server The NetGuard offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI and JPEG formats With regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server users are individual user rights permitting able to export in the AVI format Will you use a Net based client application What is Net The Net software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide th
99. Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 57 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc General Settings Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The General Settings window lets you manage a variety of settings such as user rights e mail and SMS settings logging etc Access To access the General Settings window click the General Settings button in the Administrator window The General Settings window is divided into a number of sections Administrator Settings The Administrator Settings section lets you password protect access to the Administrator application and restrict user rights When the Enable Protection check box is selected users must supply the administrator password in order to be able to access the Administrator application and in order to be able to use any of the features to which access has been restricted Changing the Administrator Password To change the administrator password click the Change Password button to open the Change Password window When an administrator password is in use users accessing the Administrator application or wishing to use protected features must type the administrator password in the window before access is granted Restricting Users Rights To restrict how users who are not administrators use the Monitor application select the Enable Protection
100. General Settings window s Event Recording Settings section Event log files should be viewed using the Monitor application s Viewer or the NetGuard EVS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 231 Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log NetGuard EVS In the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected Image Server Log Files These files log activity on the Image Server service A log file is created for each day the Image Server is used By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVR software Image Server log files are named according to the structure ISLog_YYYYMMDD log e g ISLog_20051231 log Image Server Audit Log Files These files log NetGuard NetGuardand NetGuard EVS user activity if audit logging is enabled in the Image Server Administrator A log file is created for each day with remote user activity By default placed in a subfolder named ISAuditLog under the folder containing the NetDVR software Image Server audit log files are named according to the structure is_auditYYYMMDD log e g is_audit20053112 log Export Log Files These files log activity regarding database export from the Monitor application s Viewer A log file is created for each day on which export wa
101. Guard Logging In When accessing the NetGuard either running it from the NetDVR server or by opening a locally installed version you will be asked to log in To log in do the following 1 Specify your login information in the following fields Username Type your user name as specified by your system administrator The user name is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing for example amanda and Amanda Password Type your password as specified by your system administrator The password is case sensitive Address Type the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator This will typically be the same URL or IP address you used if connecting to the NetGuard through a browser although it may occasionally be a different one Port Internet connections may use different ports for different purposes Specify the port number your system administrator has asked you to use when logging in to the NetGuard In most circumstances port 80 is used Tip The vast majority of NetGuard users will always log in to the same address and port number However if you occasionally log in to different addresses and ports or log in with different user names the Previous Logins list lets you select your previously specified logins in which case all you have to do is specify your password 2 Click the Login link After a short wait theNetGuard window will open The NetGuard window has three tabs Live Browse
102. Lets you import individual users defined locally on the server and authenticate them based on their Windows login This method only works for NetGuard EVS users Each of the two methods is described in the following How to Add a New Basic User To define a new dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication click the User administration window s Add Basic User button specify required user name and password and click OK This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users In the list s Type column the user will appear as a Basic User A Basic user is furthermore indicated by a blue dot next to the user icon Example How to Add a New Windows User Prerequisites The users you want to add must have been defined as local PC users on the server Simple file sharing must be disabled on the server To disable simple file sharing right click Windows Start button and select Explore In the window that opens select the Tools menu then select Folder Options then the View tab Scroll to the bottom of the tab s Advanced Settings list and make sure that the Use simple files sharing Recommended check box is cleared When ready click OK and close the window Provided required users have been defined locally on the server and simple file sharing is disabled on the server you are able to add Windowsusers the following way 1 In the User administration window click the Add W
103. Lets you use the NetGuard directly from the NetDVR server in browser mode In browser mode you view the NetGuard just like a regular web page in Internet Explorer 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 197 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Download and install NetGuard locally Lets you download and install the NetGuard on your computer If you prefer this option see Downloading and Installing the NetGuard Tip By selecting Remember my settings you can save your preferred access method e g browser mode and automatically use it the next time you connect This requires that your browser s privacy settings allow cookies to check your browser s privacy settings select the Tools menu then Internet Options then the Privacy tab on which privacy settings are determined in the Settings section Accessing a Locally Installed NetGuard If the NetGuard is already installed locally simply click the NetGuard shortcut to access it Depending on your selections when installing the NetGuard locally the shortcut is typically located in Windows quick launch bar next to the Start button occasionally it may be placed on your desktop NetGuard shortcut icon You may also access a locally installed NetGuard by selecting Start gt All Programs gt NetDVRNetGuard then selecting either browser or full screen mode Upon Accessing the Net
104. NetGuard EVS may initially look quite similar However the two clients are programmed differently they have different installation requirements and one client offers more features than the other Programming Differences Net or Not As opposed to the NetGuard the NetGuard EVS has been developed based on the Net software development platform Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running the NetGuard EVS The Net software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The Net platform enhances software developers ability to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore expect the Net based NetGuard EVS to be a highly flexible client ready for integration of new features plugins etc However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a Net based solution is not desirable If your organization has chosen to apply a conservati
105. PG WAV files image audio clip 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 140 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To export evidence from the Viewer use the following procedure 1 Click the Export icon This will open the Export control panel The Export control panel 2 In the Export control panel s Video Feed and Audio Feed lists select the camera and if required audio source you want to export Tip With the options Current Video Feed s and Current Audio Feed s you can batch export all cameras and microphones in your current view 3 Browse to the required start time for the export and click the Start Time section s Set button 4 Browse to the required stop time of the export and click the Stop Time section s Set button 5 Select required Export Format click the Next button and follow one of the procedures described in the following Note that procedures vary depending on the selected export format Export format AVI file a Select required Export Path if you keep the default setting the files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop b Select required frame rate Full will export all images to the AVI file Half will reduce the size of the AVI file by only exporting every second image yet still play back in real time speed c Select whether timestamps from the surveillance system
106. Settings for a PTZ Patrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify timing settings for the patrol scheme 1 In the Stay at each position in the patrol schedule field specify the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera should stay at each preset position 2 In the Time for each PTZ camera movement to complete field specify the number of seconds required for the PTZ camera to move between preset positions In order not to generate false motion alarms motion detection for the PTZ camera is automatically disabled while the camera moves between two preset positions After the specified number of seconds motion detection is automatically enabled again It is thus important that the camera is able to reach all of the patrolling scheme s preset positions within the number of seconds you specify If not false motion is likely to be detected Bear in mind that it takes longer for the PTZ camera to move between positions that are located physically far apart e g from an extreme left position to an extreme right position than between positions that are located physically close together 3 The total number of seconds between each preset position will be listed below the two fields 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 45 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc PTZ Patrolling Actions on
107. Start event list lets you select the required start event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Stop event When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the NetDVR software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Stop event list lets you select the required stop event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Patrol scheme When you set a Patrolling period for a PTZ camera with patrolling the Patrol scheme list lets you select the required patrol scheme Note The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up Camera Alert Scheduler Window s Calendar Section The Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section lets you specify exact periods of time for each option for each camera selected in the window s Camera list Set and Clear Modes Depending on your selection in the Mode list you Set or Clear periods in the calendar Your selection is indicated by your mouse pointer turning into either a pencil Set or an eraser Clear when inside the calendar section Mouse pointer turns into pen
108. TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events NetDVR listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 To add a generic event do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the Generic Events button This will open the Generic Events window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 103 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 2 In the Generic Events window first select the Generic item then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events 3 Now specify information in the following fields Event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Event Protocol Select which protocol NetDVR should listen for Any i e TCP as well as UDP TCP only or UDP only Which port is used NetDVR listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 Event rule type Select how particular NetDVR should be when analyzing received data packages Match if the received package must contain only the exact message specified in the Event message include field see description in the following Search if the received package must contain the message specified in the
109. VS client s Browse tab No motion Indicates that motion is currently not detected in the camera s images the images you see will not be updated until there is motion This message will only appear if the surveillance system administrator has specified that images should only be updated when there is motion a feature which can 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 191 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc help reduce server load and bandwidth consumption Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Not connected Indicates that it is not possible to connect to the camera for example because the camera itself is disconnected from the network Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Not initialized Indicates that the camera is not in an operative state Consult your surveillance system administrator if the problem persists The server is running out of disk space Indicates that limited disk space is available on the surveillance system server If more disk space is not made available on the surveillance system server recording will be affected Consult your surveillance system administrator The server has encountered a database problem Indicates that a database problem has occurred on the surveillance server Consult your surveillance system administrator who will have access to tools for di
110. Views You are Able to Create and Edit To quickly determine which of the Views section s top level folders your user rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following 1 Select any of the NetGuard EVS client s tabs 2 Look at the Views section You are able to create and edit views under top level folders which are not marked by a padlock icon If a top level folder is marked by a padlock icon it is protected You can still use any views under the top level folder but you cannot create new views or edit existing views under it Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights Creating Private Views Note Views are created on the NetGuard EVS client s Setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab To create your first private view you first create a group under the Private top level group then create the required view within the group If you have created private views before you may create the new view in an existing group or you may create a new group for the view Creating a Group To create a group under the Private top level folder do the following on the Setup tab 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the Private top level folder 2 Click the Create New Group button 3 A new group is created The new group is simply named New Group 4 Overwrite the default name New Group with a group name of your choice You are now able to create
111. You access the Define Exclusion Regions window by clicking the Exclude Regions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be Disabled The Define Exclusion Regions window features a preview image from the camera You define the areas in which motion detection should be disabled in the preview image which is divided into small sections by a grid To define areas in which motion detection should be disabled drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in blue Tip Even though areas in which motion detection should be disabled are always highlighted in blue in the Define Exclusion Regions window itself you are able to select a different color for the optional highlighting of areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Such color selection takes place in the Select Color window Define Exclusion Regions Window s Buttons and Check Boxes The Define Exclusion Regions window features the following buttons Button Check Box Description Set All Lets you quickly select all grid sections in the preview image This may be advantageous if you want to disable motion detection in most areas of the image in which case you can simply clea
112. You specify the required time by selecting the hour minute and second values respectively then clicking the field s up and down buttons to increase or decrease values Tip You may also simply overwrite selected hour minute or second values Add Adds the archiving time specified in the Time to add field to the Daily archiving time list Delete Removes a selected archiving time from the Daily archiving time list Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply If the Archive Setup window s Enable Archiving check box is selected this section lists cameras for which archiving is possible The section lists all enabled cameras i e cameras which depending on their individual settings may transfer video to the surveillance system The section also lists the path to the archiving directory for each camera Tip If a particular camera is not listed it is highly likely that the camera is disabled To check if a camera is disabled look for the camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section A disabled camera will be clearly indicated by an icon and can be enabled by right clicking the camera name Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras To specify that archiving should apply for a specific camera select the check box next to the name of the required camera Specifying that archiving should apply for a specific camera Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enable
113. a view within the group 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 162 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Creating a View within the Group To create a view in a group do the following 5 In the Setup tab s Views section make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected 2 Click the Create New View button 3 Select the required layout for your new view Example only You are able to select layouts for displaying up to 64 8 8 cameras in a single view Tip Some of the selectable view layouts are marked Wide These view layouts are especially suitable for widescreen monitors 4 A new view is created under the group you selected The new view carries the default name New View plus an indication of the selected layout 5 Overwrite the default name with a view name of your choice You are now able to add cameras to the view Tip A group can contain an unlimited number of views You may also create any number of subgroups if required Tip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views Creating Shared Views Note Views are created on the NetGuard EVS client s setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab and in order to be able to create shared views When creating a shared view bear in mind that depending on their user right
114. agnosing surveillance server database problems The server has lost connection to the camera Indicates that the surveillance server has lost connection to the camera This may be a temporary issue for example due to maintenance Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt The NetGuard EVS supports use of multiple windows This is especially useful if your computer has more than one physical display attached but even when your computer has only one display you can send individual views to separate windows while keeping the NetGuard EVS client s main window in the background This way you can watch more than one view at a time You can send views to separate displays or windows from the NetGuard EVS client s Live tab as well as its Browse tab Sending a View to Primary Display Sending a view to Primary Display will show the view in a separate full screen window on your computer s main display Example of a view sent to the Primary Display While you are viewing the separate full screen window the main NetGuard EVS window will be hidden behind it The separate full screen window will only show the selected view none of the Live or Browse tab s other features and it can only show one view at a time Any hotspots carousels NetMatrix positions still images or HTML pages included in the view will work as usual To send a view to Primary Display do the following 1 In the Live or Browse tab s Views section right click t
115. ameras to the View Having created a view within a group you are able to specify which cameras should be included in the view To add cameras to a view do the following 3 In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of the NetGuard window 2 In the Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 3 In the list select a camera and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view the name of the camera will appear in the selected position You will not see images from the camera yet as the Setup tab is only for configuration not for viewing images Repeat for each camera required in the view Tip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view beginning at the selected position Remember to have sufficient positions available in the view Tip You can always change the cameras in your view Either drag the System Overview section s Clear link to a position in the view to clear the position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position 4 You are now able to use your view You may your user rights permitting select the view on the Live tab s
116. anager section by right clicking the name of the camera in question See more information under Administrator window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit device settings window lets you edit the settings of an already installed device The Edit device settings window Access To access the Edit device settings window select the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section and click the Edit Device button The Edit device settings window is divided into two sections 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 19 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Identify Video Device Section The Identify Video Device section contains the following fields buttons etc Field Button Description Device Type Select required device type from list Tip NetDVR is able to automatically detect device type as well as serial number provided the IP address hostname and password of the device have been specified in the IP address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number Detect Device Click button to auto detect device type and serial number Note Use of the auto detect feature requires that the IP address and password of th
117. ance Systems Inc Tip In the camera layout the selected camera is indicated by a light blue image bar When the selected camera is stopped the button becomes a Start button Click the Start button to make the camera transfer images to NetDVR again Start All Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Starts all cameras i e makes all cameras transfer images to NetDVR Stop All Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Stops all cameras When all cameras are stopped no images are transferred to NetDVR from any of the cameras Output Displays all available output buttons for the selected camera Output buttons are used for manually triggering external output for example for switching on lights sirens or similar When Output is selected Output button depressed any output buttons for the selected camera will be displayed below the Events button Simply click an output button to trigger the associated output Example of output buttons Up to eight output buttons can be displayed for each camera Output buttons are defined in the Administrator application Ask your system administrator if in doubt about using output buttons defined for use with cameras in your organization Events Displays all available event buttons for the selected camera Depending on configuration event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes including triggering combinations of actions For example the clicking of an e
118. and Setup The Live tab is used for viewing live images from cameras the Browse tab is used for browsing recorded images from cameras and the Setup tab is used for configuring the NetGuard Note Depending on your user rights you may not be able to access all three tabs 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 198 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc If You Log in for the First Time If you have logged in for the first time you need to determine whether any views exist Views determine how images from cameras are displayed in the NetGuard and are thus required in order to be able to use the NetGuard One or more views may already have been created for you or you may need to create views yourself Read more about views including how to determine if any views have already been created for you in Creating Views Logging in on Different Computers Your user settings are stored on the NetDVR server This means that your login can be used on any computer that has a NetGuardinstalled The way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed in the NetGuard is called a view A view may contain images from up to 16 cameras A NetGuard can handle an unlimited number of views allowing you to switch between various collections of camera images In order to help you maintain an easy overview when you navigate between various views in your NetGuard all v
119. and a Z axis where the Z axis refers to the depth zoom level Example X Y and Z axes Button Check Box Description Invert y axis Lets you invert the Y axis This way you are able to select whether the camera should move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively z axis uses a relative positioning scheme Lets you specify whether the Z axis should use a relative or an absolute positioning scheme This will affect the way you zoom in and out with camera Default values Lets you use the joystick s default axes settings The Joystick Buttons section lets you specify which joystick buttons should be used for particular actions To assign an action to a particular joystick button select the required action in the list then click the required joystick button When a button is assigned to an action the name of the button will be listed together with the name of the action To stop using a particular joystick button for a particular action select the button action in the list then click the Unselect button To free all joystick buttons from their associated actions click the Unselect All button You view live images on the NetGuard s Live tab When you select the NetGuard client s Live tab the NetGuard will connect to the NetDVR server and display live images from the cameras in the selected view Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Live tab In order to
120. and a relatively small amount of content can be displayed without the need for scrolling 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 170 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Examples of the same HTML page viewed with different scaling values Enable HTML scripting Select only if the HTML page is a custom made HTML page to be used for navigating or triggering features inside the NetGuard EVS itself see examples of such custom made HTML pages in Using an HTML Page for NetGuard EVS Navigation If selected a client script required for navigating and controlling a number of features inside the NetGuard EVS will be added to the HTML page For HTML pages which are not going to be used for such purposes the client script cannot be used and may even cause the HTML page to malfunction Navigating the HTML Page The HTML page can be navigated using the links on the HTML page itself Furthermore each HTML page in a view will feature four navigation buttons in the top bar From left to right the buttons are Back Forward Refresh and Home Adding NetMatrix Content NetMatrix is an integrated product that allows distributed viewing of video from any surveillance system camera to any monitor known as a NetMatrix recipient on a network With a typical NetMatrix configuration live images are automatically presented on the required NetMatrix recipient
121. are When this is the case click the Run button 5 The NetGuard Setup Wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Accessing and configuring the NetGuard is very straightforward Even first time users will typically be able to start and set up their NetGuard in a matter of minutes Access The NetGuard may either be installed locally on the remote user s computer or it may be run from the NetDVR server and accessed by connecting to the server through an Internet Explorer browser See the following descriptions Accessing a NetGuard Run from Server If you want to run the NetGuard straight from the NetDVR server open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator When you connect to the NetDVR server you will see a welcome page In the NetGuard section of the welcome page select between three ways of accessing the NetGuard Run NetGuard from server in full screen mode Lets you use the NetGuard directly from the NetDVR server in full screen mode In full screen mode Internet Explorer s usual navigation buttons are not shown which means that more screen space is available for viewing the NetGuard window If selecting this option you may be required to download the file full hta Downloading this file ensures that the NetGuard will work properly in full screen mode Run NetGuard from server in browser mode
122. at the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Monitor log files are named according to the structure MonitorYYYYMMDD log e g Monitor20051231 log Recording Server Service Log Files These files log activity in the recording server when it runs as the Recording Server service A log file is created for each day the service is used Installation dependent These log files are only generated when the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service If the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application these log files are not generated See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVR software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Recording Server service log files are named according to the structure RecordingServerYYYYMMDD log e g RecordingServer20051231 log Event Log Files These files log information about registered events read more about events in About Input Events amp Output A log file is created for each day on which events have occurred By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVR software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the
123. ator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Editing Settings for Audio Sources To edit the settings for an audio source listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to which the audio source is attached select the required audio source then click the Settings button to open the Audio Device Settings window IMPORTANT The use of audio sources will impact the database capacity for storing video see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Disabling Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources Individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that video from cameras and audio from attached microphones is by default transferred to NetDVR provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default IMPORTANT The use of audio sources will impact the database capacity for storing video see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Note On some devices audio can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If audio on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to audio being disabled on the device itself If required you can disable individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section When a camera or audio source
124. ator window double click the Image Server Administrator desktop shortcut Each section of the ImageServer Administrator window is described in the following Server Configuration Section The Server Configuration section is used for specifying server name and port for enabling optional external access to the server for optional definition of IP address ranges which should be recognized as being local and for specifying a maximum number of remote users allowed to connect simultaneously The Server Configuration section contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Name Lets you specify a name for the server By default the name is simply Server You are able to change the default name NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users with rights to configure their clients will see the name of the server when they create views on their client s Setup tab Port Lets you specify a port number to use for the server The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Enable Outside Access Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the internet via a router or firewall If selecting this option also specify the outside public IP address and port number in the Outside IP Address and Outside Port fields Note When using outside access the router or firewall used must be configured so requests sent to the outside public IP address and port are forwarded to the inside local IP add
125. b the more terms you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve Example Many results match the criterion User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday Remove Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of a cursor positioned in the Event message include field If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field the last item in the field will be removed Notification Settings Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields in the Notificationsettings section Field Description Send Email if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When you have edited the generic event click OK 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 94 Administrator Appl
126. been saved at a location accessible by the surveillance server for example on a network drive or on a USB stick 1 Open the Administrator window 2 In the Administrator window click the Import DLKs button 3 Browse to the location at which you have saved the received dlk file Select the file and click Open All DLKs are now automatically imported and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 16 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Device Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In NetDVR you add devices IP video camera devices or IP video server devices rather than actual cameras This is because devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based NetDVR primarily identifies units on the surveillance system based on their IP addresses or host names You are able to add up to 64 cameras If using video server devices on your system bear in mind that many video server devices can have more than one camera connected to them For example a fully used four port video server will count as four cameras Even though each device has its own IP address or host name several cameras can be attached to a single device
127. button is clicked Like with input VMD and generic events the association between event buttons and outputs is made in the I O Control window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for adding event buttons lets you specify the settings for an event button The Add New Event window for specifying event buttons Access You access the Add New Event window for adding event buttons from the Event Buttons window Select an entry either global or for a specific camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 83 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for adding event buttons contains the following fields Field Description Button related to Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the event will be specified If the field displays Global the event button will be a global event button available for all cameras Manual event name Lets you specify a name for the event button Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert
128. by selecting the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then clicking the Administrator window s Edit Device button The iPIX section contains the following fields and buttons Field Description Enable iPIX Select check box to enable the use of IPIX a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced fish eye lens on the particular camera iPIX Settings Opens the iPIX Camera Configuration window in which you configure the camera s IPIX functionality Database Settings The database for each camera is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB per day Note that camera databases also store recorded audio from associated audio sources see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Tip By using archiving it is possible to store recordings beyond the capabilities of the camera s database The Database Settings section lets you specify database settings for the camera such as where the database containing the camera s recordings should be kept how much to store etc You specify this information in the following fields Field Description Max records in database Select this option to limit the database size based on a maximum allowed number of records in the database Specify required maximum number of records in the neighboring field When the maximum number of records in the database is reached the oldest record in the da
129. cal IP address ranges etc Very flexible configuration through ImageServer Administrator includes handling of local IP address ranges etc System Administrator s Access Control Options Limited user rights primarily determined on a per camera basis Very flexible rights for accessing individual NetGuard and camera features are determined on a per user basis Very flexible rights for accessing individual NetGuard EVS and camera features can be determined on a per user basis 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 146 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Client Flexibility re Future Features and Plugins Very limited Limited Net based thus offering a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc The client solution of the future Recommended Use Systems with remote users on very slow connections Systems on which installation of client software must be optional Systems on which a Net client solution is not desirable Systems on which the recording server has been installed as a service rather than as the Monitor application Systems on which a Net client solution is desirable Systems on which a high degree of flexibility e g use of remote access plugin features will be required Specific Differences Between NetGuard and NetGuard EVS The NetGuard and
130. ce Name Camera Name window Access To access the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window click the PTZ Preset Positions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The button is only available if the camera supports PTZ preset positions Note that if the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available see the description of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window for information about how to make the button available Why Use Preset Positions Defined preset positions can be used for making the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur and for specifying PTZ patrolling schemes Defined preset positions will also become selectable in the Monitor application as well as in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS allowing users of these applications to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 39 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras Your configuration options depend on whether the PTZ camera in question is of the absolute positioning or relative positioning kind Absolute For an absolute positioning PTZ camera you are able to define up to 50 preset positions All 50 preset positions can be used i
131. cified them on the Image Server Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server Port Port to use when accessing the Image Server e g 80 NetGuard EVS Users When users log in with NetGuard EVS they must select between using basic or Windows based authentication Provide them with the following information Server Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server plus any port number required In the NetGuard EVS clients s login dialog users will enter this information in a single field called Server Address so if the IP address is 123 123 123 123 and the port number is 80 tell users 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 153 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc that the Server Address is 123 123 123 123 80 Authentication In the NetGuard EVS s login dialog users will be asked to select between basic authentication or Windows based authentication Windows based authentication may in turn be based on the currently logged in Windows user o If using basic user name and password authentication tell users that the required authentication is Basic authentication o If using Windows based authentication based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication current user o If using Windows based authentication which should not necessarily be based on the c
132. cify or view a schedule in the window s calendar section Note Always verify that you have selected the required camera in the list even though schedules displayed in the calendar section may look and indeed sometimes be similar the displayed schedule refers specifically to the selected camera Mode Select whether to add or delete periods in the calendar section Set Add periods May also be used to overwrite existing periods Clear Delete existing periods Online Check the Online box when you want to set or clear online periods for the selected camera E mail Check the E mail box when you want to set or clear periods with e mail alerts for the selected camera Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window SMS Check the SMS box when you want to set or clear periods with SMS mobile phone text message alerts for the selected camera Such SMS alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Sound Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording serve
133. cil Set or eraser Clear when inside calendar section Zoom Feature When placing your mouse pointer inside the day band in the top part of the calendar section you get access to the calendar s zoom feature With the zoom feature you are able to toggle between the calendar s default seven day view and a single day view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 55 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The single day view provides you with five minute interval indications allowing you to specify periods precisely Calendar s zoom feature allows you to toggle between seven day and single day views How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar To set or clear a period in the Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section simply click at the required start point in the calendar and drag to set clear a period depending on whether you have selected Set or Clear in the window s Mode list Good to Know when You Set Online Periods When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the NetDVR software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event remember to specify required start and stop events in the Start event and Stop event lists Good to Know when You Set Patrolling Periods When
134. computer on which the HTML page will be used 4 Import the HTML page into the NetGuard views in which it will be used 5 Test that the navigation controls on the imported HTML page work as intended 6 Enjoy simple and intuitive NetGuard navigation tailored to meet your organization s needs To log out of the NetGuard simply click the Log Out button in the NetGuard client s top bar Log Out button Web and Realtime Feed Servers Installation dependent features Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences NetDVR features two alternatives to using the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS for providing remote access to the surveillance system The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server do not offer as advanced functionality as the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS neither at the server end nor at the client end However if remote users are to access the surveillance system through very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections using the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server may be advisable The Web Server handles navigation and still image viewing whereas the Realtime Feed Server handles all live a
135. cording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Adds the Monitor application to Windows Startup group making the Monitor application open automatically each time Windows is started on the computer Allow cameras to run in the background Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected it will be possible to let some or all of the cameras connected to the NetDVR server run in the background i e without the cameras being included in the Monitor application For such background cameras the features of the Monitor application will not be immediately available although recorded images from such cameras can still be browsed in 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 61 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc the Monitor application s Viewer However background cameras can be accessed for viewing of live and recorded images through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS For further informati
136. ct whether the input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises High or falls Low External event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 98 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing
137. ction alarm time and end time Example of Alarmslist Likewise clicking the right arrow lets you browse forward in time in a list of sequences in which motion was detected The list displays information about start time first motion detection alarm time and end time for each sequence By clicking the list s links you are able to jump to the images matching each sequence s start time first motion detection alarm time and end time Clicking the Overview link lets you quickly jump to a list of the newest sequences in which motion was detected Live Switches to live view for the selected camera Live view lets you view live images from the selected camera When viewing live images you are able to select between low medium and high image quality The pause button start buttons in the live view lets you pause and start the live feed as required 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 229 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc If configured for the selected camera output buttons may also be available Output buttons are used for triggering external output for example for switching on lights sounding a siren etc Ask your NetDVR system administrator if in doubt For PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras PTZ navigation buttons will also become available in the live view provided you have the user rights required to control PTZ cameras To return to v
138. cular camera To use smart search do the following 1 Select the required camera in the camera layout 2 Single view is required to use smart search If you are not already viewing images from the selected camera in single view click the Single View icon in the toolbar to switch to single view Single View icon 3 Click the Smart Search icon in the toolbar to open the Smart Search control panel Smart Search control panel When the Smart Search control panel opens a blue grid will also appear as an overlay on the image in the camera layout 4 Click and drag inside the image to select the areas in which you want to perform the smart search The areas you select will become visible through the blue overlay The blue overlay thus indicates areas to be excluded from the smart search 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 136 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example of selected area 5 In the Smart Search control panel select required sensitivity in the Sensitivity list 6 Select required image interval in the Interval list If you select All Images all images will be analyzed if you select e g Image every 10 seconds only one image per ten seconds of recordings will be analyzed Selecting a long interval will greatly reduce the time required to complete the search However with a long interval the search may not find
139. d NetDVR listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 Event rule type Lets you select how particular NetDVR should be when analyzing received data packages Match In order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field and nothing else Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field but may also have more content Example If you have specified that the event message should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the message includes the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 91 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Event priority The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between 0 lowest priority and 1000 highest priority When NetDVR receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the even
140. d available cameras are indicated by green squares To select a camera click a green square The selected square will be highlighted and a still image from the selected camera will appear next to the menu 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 227 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Blue squares may appear Such blue squares simply indicate that no camera is available in the particular section of the NetDVR surveillance system s Monitor application Archives Non recent images are typically saved in so called archives The Archives link lets you select and view archived images from the selected camera provided such archives are available Image Lets you browse recorded images from the recent database of the selected camera image by image Clicking the left arrow will take you to the image preceding the currently viewed image unless the currently viewed image is the first stored image Clicking the right arrow will take you to the image following the currently viewed image unless the currently viewed image is the last stored image Tip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Motion Lets you browse images from the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Clicking the left arrow will take you to the previous image in which motion was detected unless the currently
141. d New Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device The Add New Output window Note Before you specify output for a device verify that the output is supported by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the NetDVR release note to verify that output is supported for the device and firmware used Access You access the Add New Output window by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new output event button in the I O Setup window If the device does not support output the button will not be available Add New Output Window s Fields The Add New Output window contains the following fields Field Description External output connected to Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event is defined Output connected on Lets you select which of the device s output ports the output is connected to Many cameras only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Keep output for Lets you specify the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max Five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information
142. d for the selected cameras Specifying Archiving Locations for Specific Cameras A default archiving location is specified for each camera The default archiving directory called Archives will be located at this location To specify another location for the archiving directory for a camera either click the browse icon next to the path listing for the required camera and browse to the required location or click the default path listing to overwrite it 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 120 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Overwriting an existing path Tip To maximize load sharing and optimize performance distribute archives across your available storage space if possible Note If specifying another archiving location than the default location the location you specify must exist You are not able to create new directories as part of the process If archiving to a network drive the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the NetDVR system Archives for the selected camera will be stored in separate subdirectories under the Archives directory at the location you specify The subdirectories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoServerChannel DateAndTime Example With the default archivin
143. d name in the Quad field at the top of the quad view in question then click the Save Setup link 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 230 Logging Various types of log files can be generated by NetDVR Log File Types Locations and Names NetDVR is able to generate the following types of log files Administrator Log Files These files log activity in the Administrator A log file is created for each day the Administrator is used By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVR software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Administrator log files are named according to the structure AdminYYYYMMDD log e g Admin20051231 log Monitor Application Log Files These files log activity in the recording server when it runs as the Monitor application A log file is created for each day the Monitor application is used Installation dependent These log files are only generated when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service these log files are not generated See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVR software Note however th
144. d on input received from external input units such as sensors attached to doors windows etc connected to cameras or other devices on a NetDVR system To add an input based event do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 97 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the input unit is connected then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window Note Some cameras devices are capable of handling one input event only others are capable of handling several input events The content of the Add New Event window varies accordingly For simplicity reasons the following steps will describe adding an event on a camera device capable of handling one input event only 3 In the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only the External sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields Sensor connected through Select the camera device input port on which the input unit is connected Some cameras devices only have a single input port in that case simply select Input 1 Event occurs when input goes Sele
145. d term is video While typing in the Telnet window you may experience so called echo This is simply the server repeating some or all of the characters it receives it will not have any impact as long as you are sure you type the required characters 8 Close the Telnet window by clicking the close button in its top right corner 9 Go to your Monitor NetGuard or NetGuard EVS If the yellow event notification indicator lights up for the required camera your generic event works as intended Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6
146. dd new event button to access the New Timer window If dealing with TCP and or UDP based events in the Generic Events window When selecting an already specified event in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window New Timer Window s Fields The New Timer window contains the following fields Field Description Timer event is started by Read only field displaying the name of the event or event button under which the timer event is defined Timer event name Lets you specify a name for the timer event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Timer event occurs after Lets you specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event Specify the required amount of time in either seconds or minutes Examples The timer event should occur 15 seconds after the event under which it is defined has occurred The timer event should occur 2 minutes after the event button under which it has been defined has been clicked 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 77 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Ad
147. de a stand alone Viewer application in the database export select the Include Viewer Program Files check box If you include the Viewer application in the export the exported databases can be viewed and browsed on any PC no additional surveillance system software will be required Read more about the Viewer application in Using the Viewer Tip A Viewer application included in a database export will if possible match the language version of your NetGuard EVS If the Viewer application is not available in a matching language version an English language version of the Viewer application will be included 12 Click the Export button to begin the export The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export Export status bar Tip If you are exporting very large databases export may take a while You can continue to use the NetGuard EVS for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished You are now able to distribute the content of the Exported Database folder Tip If you included the Viewer application in the export double clicking the file Browser exe in the Exported Images folder will open the Viewer application ready for viewing and browsing the exported database content Tip If you included the Viewer application in your export copying all files from the Expo
148. default SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the hotspot Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the hotspot Select between Unlimited default Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in the hotspot The effect of your selection can be illustrated by the following table Effect Unlimited Medium Low JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame MPEG IFrame Send all frames Send all frames Send all frames MPEG PFrame Send all frames Do not send any frames Do not send any frames Example If you set the Frame Rate option to Low in your NetGuard EVS and your surveillance system administrator has configured a camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames per second you will experience an average of 1 frame per second when viewing video from the camera in the hotspot If your administrator had configured a camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second you would with Frame Rate set to Low in your NetGuard EVS experience an average of 0 2 frames per second when viewing video from the camera in the hotspot Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the hotspot this may
149. ding Cameras 23 Configuring Cameras 23 Include Date and Time in Image 32 Selecting Output for Manual Control 37 Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection 37 Defining a New Patrol Scheme 44 Copying an Existing Patrol Scheme 44 Renaming an Existing Patrol Scheme 45 Removing an Existing Patrol Scheme 45 Ceiling Mounted Cameras 48 Setting a View as Home Position
150. ding Server service Tip As a security measure the service is furthermore automatically resumed when you close the Administrator application Stopped Recording Server Service If the Service Manager window informs you that the recording server is stopped the Recording Server service has been stopped as opposed to paused outside the Administrator application Provided you have the required rights you will be able to start a stopped Recording Server service from Windows by selecting Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services then right clicking Recording Server and selecting Start from the menu that appears Scheduling Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Camera Alert Scheduler window lets you specify when each camera should be online A camera is online when it is transferring images to the NetDVR server for processing IMPORTANT The fact that a camera is online i e transferring images to the NetDVR server will not necessarily mean that images from the camera are recorded i e stored in the camera s database on the NetDVR server Image storage settings for individual cameras are specified in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window You are able to specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time or whether they should start and stop transferring images when specific ev
151. ding server has been installed as an application the Monitor application The Service Manager button is available only when the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Monitor Manager button opens the Monitor Manager window in which you specify which cameras should record and display images in the Monitor application It also lets you configure the layout of the Monitor application The Service Manager button opens the Service Manager window which lets you pause resume theRecording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features for example configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras IMPORTANT While the service is paused no video or audio will be recorded Scheduler Opens the Camera Alert Scheduler window in which you specify online periods for each camera You are also able to specify if cameras should go online when specific events occur e g when a door is opened and if e mail SMS or sound alerts should be used if motion is detected during specific periods of time e g during working hours If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if certain patrol schemes should be used during specific periods of time Tip By default all cameras are online at all times You will only need to modify scheduler settings if you require
152. dings stored in a camera s regular database Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on a CD you must use the Viewer Click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required archive this way you can use all of the Viewer s browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Archive setup window lets you enable and configure the archiving feature in NetDVR It also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera Access To access the Archive setup window click the Archive Setup button in the Administrator window Archive Setup Window s Fields and Buttons The Archive setup window contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Enable Archiving Select check box to enable the archiving feature Note Remember to specify for which cameras the archiving feature should be used you do this in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Delete databases in the backup directory older than Lets you specify how many days you want to keep archived recordings for Archived recordings older than the specified number of days will automatically be deleted Send email on archive error Select check bo
153. do the following 1 In the Monitor Manager window select a grid size for the camera layout grid e g 3 3 Note that if you want to use a hot spot see description of Monitor Manager window s Configuration section the space required for the hot spot will affect the number of camera positions will be available in the camera layout grid For example a 3 3 grid will normally contain nine camera positions with a 2 2 hot spot however only five camera positions will be available 2 Select a position in the Monitor Manager window s camera layout grid The selected position will be indicated in light gray whereas non selected positions will be dark gray 3 Select the required camera from the Select Camera list An image from the selected camera will be displayed in the selected camera layout grid position If an image from the camera is not yet available a camera icon will appear Note that a disabled camera cannot be selected for more information about disabling enabling cameras see the description of the Administrator window 4 Repeat step 2 3 for other required cameras Tip You are always able to change the camera selection for a position in the layout grid Simply select the required position when a position already contains a camera image it will be highlighted with a yellow border when you select it then select a different camera from the Select Camera list Recording Server Service Management Note Access to features in
154. do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to the required position in the view When you release the mouse button over the required position the Open URL window opens Open URL window 2 In the Open URL window s Open field type the URL of the required HTML page example http www mywebsite com mywebpage htm or If the HTML page is stored locally on your computer specify its location on your computer example C myfiles mywebpage htm or click the Browse button to browse for the required HTML page 3 Click the OK link Changing the Properties of an HTML Page Once an HTML page is added to a view you are able to change its properties by doing the following 4 On the Setup tab select the imported HTML page in the view Properties of the selected HTML page will appear in the Setup tab s Properties section 5 Change the required property Url Click the New button to specify a new URL or location of the required HTML page Scaling Select the required scaling of the HTML page The optimal scaling depends entirely on the content of the imported HTML page and how you want to display it As a rule of thumb with a high scaling value e g 1280 1024 text on the HTML page will appear relatively small and a considerable amount of content will be visible without the need for scrolling With a low scaling value e g 320 200 text on the HTML page will appear relatively large
155. doubt 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 202 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To add cameras to a view do the following 3 In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of the NetGuard window 2 In the Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 3 In the list select a camera and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view the name of the camera will appear in the selected position You will not see images from the camera yet as the Setup tab is only for configuration not for viewing images Repeat for each camera required in the view Tip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view beginning at the selected position Remember to have sufficient positions available in the view Tip You can always change the cameras in the view Either drag the System Overview section s Clear link to a position in the view to clear the position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position 4 NetGuard users on your surveillance system wi
156. dow 9 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be available in the Monitor and NetGuard NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or output in the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the ImageServer Administrator window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically when motion is detected by a camera The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the motion detecting camera To add a motion triggered output do the following Note The following describes one way of adding a motion triggered output namely through the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Alternatively motion triggered output may be based on VMD events or if a device has its own motion detection capabilities on input events Once such VMD or input events have been added they can be tied to output through the I O Control window Note In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been
157. e ready to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address Default Http Port When selected HTTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 80 If you want to use another port for HTTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box Default Ftp Port When selected FTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 21 If you want to use another port for FTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box Root Password Password required in order to log in to the device using the root account occasionally known as an admin or administrator account Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for Device Name window may be limited if cameras are not PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras or connected to a video server device The Camera Settings for Device Name window lets you specify certain information about a device s cameras This is particularly interesting for PTZ cameras and cameras attached to a video server device The Camera Settings for Device Name window Access You access the Camera Settings for Device Name window by clicking the Camera Settings button in the Edit device settings window The Camera
158. e administrator rights The Color window lets you select a color to be used for highlighting detected motion when images from a camera are viewed in the Monitor application Access You access the Color window by clicking the Motion Color button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Selecting a Color for Highlighting Detected Motion To select a color pick the required color from the Basic Colors palette and click OK The ability to define custom colors is not available Note Highlighting of detected motion in the Monitor application requires that the Show Motion check box in the Camera Monitor section of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is selected Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Define Exclusion Regions window lets you disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 34 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The Define Exclusion Regions window with an exclusion area highlighted in blue Access
159. e device have been specified in the IP address and Root Password fields Device Name Name used to identify the device Tip To enable easy identification of devices it is often a good idea to use a device name that refers to the physical area covered by the cameras attached to the device examples Reception Area Car Park B Entrance Door Note Device names must be unique you cannot use the same name for several devices Camera Settings Opens the Camera Settings for Device Name window in which you are able to specify a number of settings for cameras attached to the device including Port through which PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are controlled Camera names types and ports Note The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for Device Name window may be limited if cameras are not PTZ cameras or connected to a video server device Device Serial Number Serial number of device usually identical to the 12 character MAC address of the device example 0123456789AF Tip NetDVR is able to automatically detect serial number as well as device type provided the IP address host name and password of the device have been specified in the IP address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number Device License Key A 16 character license key DLK for the device obtained when registering the software Enable iPIX E
160. e expand icon in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window The defined event button will now be available in the Monitor and NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or events in the NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the ImageServer Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event button will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVR Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVR such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously Tip If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detection triggered activation of an output device only such as a siren a strobe light etc see How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define an event based on NetDVR detecting motion on a particular camera VMD s
161. e move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively Absolute By default joystick control takes place based on a relative positioning scheme This means that moving a joystick will move the joystick controlled object based on the object s current position rather than based on any fixed position By selecting Absolute you are able to change this and use an absolute rather than a relative positioning scheme Action Lets you select the required action for an axis Camera Pan Camera Tilt Camera Zoom or No action Preview Lets you quickly test the effect of your selections When you have selected an action for the axis you want to test simply move the joystick along the required axis to view the effect indicated by a movement of the dark blue bar 5 In the Button Setup section specify an action for each required joystick button You select the required action in the Action column Tip To quickly verify that you are configuring the required button simply press the required button on the joystick When the button is pressed a dark blue color will appear in the Button Setup section s Preview column for the button in question Disabling Joystick Use To disable the use of joysticks on your NetGuard EVS select the Joystick Setup window s Disable all joysticks check box Joystick Setup is Tied to User Login on Particular Computer Unlike your views and custom keyboard settings which are simply
162. e Recording Server service this window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Joystick Setup window lets you configure joystick control of PTZ cameras in the Monitor application Joystick configuration control requires that a joystick is attached to the computer running NetDVR The Joystick Setup window Access To access the Joystick Setup window click the Joystick Setup button in the General Settings window The Joystick Setup window is divided into two sections a Joystick Axes section and a Joystick Buttons section 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 63 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Joystick Axes Section The Joystick Axes section lets you configure the axes used for the joystick With a joystick you are able to navigate PTZ camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis refers to the depth zoom level Example X Y and Z axes Button Check Box Description Invert y axis Lets you invert the Y axis This way you are able to select whether the PTZ camera should move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively z axis uses a relative positioning scheme Lets you specify whether the Z axis should use a relative or an absolute position
163. e a name which other users will immediately be able to understand Your new group will now appear in the Setup tab s Views section with the name you have specified and labeled as Shared You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View in a Shared Group To create a view in a shared group make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected in the Setup tab s Views section and do the following 3 In the Setup tab s View Control section type a name for the view in the View Name field Tip Bear in mind that since the view will appear in a shared group it will also appear in other users NetGuard clients therefore use a name which other users will immediately be able to understand 2 Click one of the View Control section s seven available New View layouts Your new view is automatically added to the selected group Tip A group whether private or shared can contain an unlimited number of views More than one private and shared group can exist Adding Cameras to the View Having created a view within a group you are able to specify which cameras should be included in the view Note Bear in mind that depending on their user rights not all users may have access to all cameras on the surveillance system Thus even though you may be able to view images from all cameras in a shared view other users may not necessarily be able to view images from all the cameras Consult your system administrator if in
164. e ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The Net platform enhances software developers ability to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore as a rule of 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 145 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc thumb expect Net based software to be highly flexible ready for integration of new features plugins etc However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a Net based solution is not desirable Instead such organizations rely on more classic Windows solutions Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer The Net based NetGuard EVS offers more features for remote users than the other solutions Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running the NetGuard EVS No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer The NetGuard is not a Net based solution The following table outlines the main differences between the three non NetPDA remote access solutions Remote Access Solutio
165. e where a new item should be included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons Likewise you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button Add Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis See also the description of the Event substring and Event message includes fields Lets you add a start parenthesis character to the Event message include field Parentheses can be used to ensure that related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday In the example the two terms inside the parenthesis will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of the string In other words the system will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 88 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc
166. e will match system time indefinitely Tip For consistent synchronization you may if supported by the camera auto synchronize camera and system time via a time server Preview Image When adjusting camera settings you are able to view the effect of your settings by clicking the Preview Image button located at the bottom of the window Clicking the Preview Image button will provide you with an image from the camera in question as it would look with the settings specified in the Camera Settings section When you have found the best possible camera settings click OK to apply the settings for the camera Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Adjust Motion Detection window lets you specify motion detection sensitivity for a specific camera Depending on your configuration motion detection sensitivity settings may determine when recordings from the camera are transferred to the surveillance system when alerts are generated when external outputs such as lights or sirens are triggered etc Motion detection sensitivity is therefore a key element in your NetDVR surveillance solution and time spent on finding the best possible motion detection settings for each camera may help you later avoid unnecessary alerts etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different ph
167. eMonitorapplication If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts in the Monitor application s Viewer feature In effect this will display the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar enabling users to send evidence via e mail If you clear the check box users will not see the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 65 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Specifying Recipients You specify the e mail addresses to which e mail alerts should be sent in the Recipient s field If specifying more than one e mail address separate the e mail addresses with semicolons example aa aa aa bb bb bb cc cc cc Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Recipient s field will appear as the default value in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite this default value Specifying Sender Settings Specify sender information in the following fields Sender e mail address Type the e mail address you wish to appear as the sender of the e mail alert Outgoing mail SMTP server name Type the name of the
168. ease contact the system administrator o Issue You currently have no access rights to any part of the NetGuard EVS therefore you cannot log in to the NetGuard EVS o What to do Consult your surveillance system administrator who will be able to change your access rights if required Failed to connect Please check the server address o Issue It was not possible to connect to the surveillance system server at the specified server address o What to do Verify that you have typed the correct server address Bear in mind that the http prefix as well as a port number is typically required as part of the server address example http 123 123 123 123 80 where 80 indicates the port number Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Failed to connect Please check the username and password o Issue It was not possible to log in to the NetGuard EVS with the specified user name and or password o What to do Verify that you have typed your user name correctly then re type your password to ensure it does not contain errors Bear in mind that user names as well as passwords may be case sensitive i e there may be a difference between typing Amanda and amanda Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Failed to connect Maximum number of clients are already connected o Issue The maximum number of remote access clients allowed to connect to the surveillance system server simultaneously has been
169. eate and edit views in the following types of groups Private and shared Private but not shared Shared but not private None at all in which case you simply rely on views created by others and placed in shared groups Typically only a few people in an organization are able to create and edit views in shared groups For example the surveillance system administrator may create and maintain a number of views and place them in shared groups When NetGuard users log in the views placed in the shared groups will automatically be available to them and the users will basically not need to create further views unless they want their own views in private groups To quickly determine which types of groups your user rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following 1 Select the NetGuard client s Setup tab Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab If you are not able to access the Setup tab you are not able to create views 2 On the Setup tab look at the Views section The Group folders to which you do not have access will be indicated by padlock icons Consult your system administrator if in doubt about your user rights Creating Views in Private Groups To create your first view in a private group you first create a group then create the required view within the group If you have created views in private groups before you may create new views in existing private groups o
170. ecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected camera images in the Monitor application will not be stretched to fit the cells in the Monitor application s camera layout Rather images will be displayed with the aspect radio with which they have been recorded This may result in horizontal or vertical black bars appearing around the images from some cameras almost as when viewing a film in the widescreen format on a regular TV screen Don t send e mail on camera failures If selected no e mail alerts will be sent if NetDVR loses contact with a camera Otherwise e mail alerts will provided the e mail alert feature has been enabled in the E Mail setup window automatically be sent if NetDVR loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Don t send SMS on camera failures If selected no SMS alerts will be sent if NetDVR loses contact with a camera Otherwise SMS alerts will provided the SMS alert feature has been enabled in the SMS settings window automatically be sent if NetDVR loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Add Monitor to Startup group Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the re
171. ed 6 After a short wait the NetGuard EVS window will open The NetGuard EVS window has three tabs Live Browse and Setup The Live tab is used for viewing live video the Browse tab is used for browsing recorded video and the Setup tab is used for configuring the NetGuard EVS Depending on your user rights you may not be able to access all three tabs If You Log in for the First Time Determine Available Views If you have logged in for the first time you need to determine whether any views exist Among other things views determine how video from cameras is displayed in the NetGuard EVS Views are thus required in order to be able to use the NetGuard EVS One or more views may already have been created for you or you may need to create views yourself Read more about views including how to determine if any views have already been created for you in Private and Shared Views 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 159 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Logging in on Different Computers Your user settings are stored centrally on the surveillance system This means that your login can be used on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed If a problem or other issue occurs during login to the NetGuard EVS you will see one of the following error messages You do not have access to any part of the application live browse or setup Pl
172. ed images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings Illustrations in this help topic and date and time formats used in these illustrations are thus for guidance only Note If exporting recordings from an IPIX camera be aware that it is only possible to export the fisheye view itself not a flattened IPIX view a 2 2 split IPIX view or zoomed IPIX views To export video evidence do the following 1 Select the NetGuard client s Browse tab 2 In the Browse tab s Export section specify start date and time for the export by typing the date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 213 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Tip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set links This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image into the Start Time fields 3 In the End Time fields specify end date and time for the export As was the case with the start date and time end date and time must be in the correct format if specified manually Alternatively use the Set link as described above 4 Select the required camera from the Source list 5 Click the Export button This will open a separate export dialog The
173. ed the PTZ camera to the required position select an undefined item may be labelled Undefined or with a position number in the Preset Positions section s list of preset position names and click the Set Position button to define a name for the preset position For detailed information about the functionality of PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window such as the ability to test your preset positions the ability to combine preset positions with events or the ability to use preset positions in PTZ patrolling schemes see Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections in the following You are able to define up to 50 preset positions PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window s Sections Each of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections are described in the following PTZ View Section The PTZ View section lets you control the PTZ camera and watch the PTZ camera s movements You use this section to move the PTZ camera to the positions you then define as presets positions in the Preset Positions section To move the PTZ camera simply click the required position in the preview picture The PTZ View section also features sliders allowing you to move the PTZ camera along each of its axes the X axis allowing you to pan left right the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down and the Z axis enabling you to zoom in and out the camera will zoom in
174. ed users access to particular cameras and features in the following way 1 Click the User Access button This will open the Define Camera Access for individual users window Define Camera Access for individual users window 2 In the User list select the required user 3 In the Defined Cameras list select the name of each camera to which the user should have access Tip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting camera names in the Defined Cameras list you are able to select several or all of the listed camera names in 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 223 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc one go 4 Click the gt gt button to move the selected camera names to the Viewable by selected user list 5 If the user in question should be able to play back recordings from the selected cameras select the Allow playback functionality via Web server check box 6 If the user in question should be able to generate AVI movie clips from recordings from the selected cameras select the Allow AVI creation via Web server check box 7 Repeat as required for other users Tip For the remote user s perspective also see Remote Access through Web and RealtimeFeed Servers Testing the Web Server Configuration To test the Web Server open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later is required on the co
175. ee Viewing Live Images and on the Browse tab see Viewing Recorded Images 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 201 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Tip In addition to cameras you are able to add static images and HTML pages to views See Further Configuration Creating Views in Shared Groups To create view in a shared group you first create a group then create the required view within the group If you have created views in shared groups before you may create new views in existing shared groups or you may create a new shared group for the view Note Views are created on the NetGuard client s Setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab and in order to be able to create shared views When creating a shared view bear in mind that depending on their user rights not all users may have access to all cameras on the surveillance system Creating a Shared Group To create a shared group do the following on the Setup tab 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the Shared folder or if you have created shared groups before any folder labeled Shared 2 In the Setup tab s Group Control section type a name for the group in the Group Name field then click the New button Tip Bear in mind that since the group is shared it will also appear in other users NetGuard clients therefore us
176. el 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 122 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Monitor Application The Monitor application is installation dependent and available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If installed the Monitor application is used for recording and displaying recordings from connected cameras with optional indications of registered activity Depending on user rights and configuration the Monitor may also be used for controlling PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras for manually starting and stopping cameras for manually triggering outputs etc From the Monitor you also have access to the Viewer with which you are able to browse and play back recordings print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats The exact look and functionality of the Monitor depends on how the Monitor has been configured in the Administrator application Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt IMPORTANT When the Monitor application is installed recordings are only transferred to NetDVR while the Monitor application is running The Monitor applicat
177. el When you later begin watching the same carousel in another view perhaps even in another window or another display the timing for that instance of the carousel begins This is why the carousel appears to be out of sync in reality you are watching two separate instances of the carousel When working on the NetGuard EVS client s Live and Browse tabs a number of simple keyboard shortcuts are available Tip In addition to the standard keyboard shortcuts you are able to assign your own custom shortcut key combinations to particular actions in the NetGuard EVS See Assigning Custom Keyboard Shortcuts 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 194 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The NetGuard EVS client s standard keyboard shortcuts are Note When using below listed shortcuts do not actually press the key When listing keyboard shortcuts the is used to indicate and then press Example For the keyboard shortcut ENTER you should thus only press the key then the ENTER key ENTER Toggles maximized regular display of the selected view position lt camera shortcut number gt ENTER Lets you change the camera displayed in the selected view position to the camera with the matching shortcut number Example If the required camera has the shortcut number 6 you would press 6 ENTER Note that camera shortcut numbers may not neces
178. elector it is possible to jump straight to recordings from a specific point in time Time amp date selector Simply select the required date in the date field and the required time in the time field Tip You are able to overwrite the fields date and time values Having used the data amp time selector to jump to recordings from a specific point in time you are able to use e g the timeline browser or the playback controls to browse through recordings from around the specified point in time 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 133 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Browsing Recordings with the Timeline Browser The timeline browser displays an overview of periods with recordings from all cameras displayed in your current camera layout The number of timelines displayed in the timeline browser reflects the number of cameras displayed in the camera layout you are viewing The timeline of the camera selected in the camera layout is highlighted Timeline browser displaying timelines for a camera layout with four cameras The timeline browser uses the following colors Red Recordings with motion Green Recordings without motion Black Periods without recordings Yellow Audio recordings The timeline browser s white horizontal line indicates the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layo
179. em The NetGuard EVS must be installed locally on the remote user s computer Tip See system requirements for the NetGuard EVS under System Requirements What are Remote Users Able to do with the NetGuard EVS With the NetGuard EVS remote users are able to View live video from cameras on the surveillance system Browse recordings from cameras on the surveillance system with a selection of advanced navigation tools including a highly intuitive timeline browser Listen to live or stored recordings from audio sources Note that audio is available when connecting to selected surveillance systems only see Surveillance System Differences Create and switch between an unlimited number of views each able to display video from up to 64 cameras from multiple servers at a time depending on the type of surveillance system you connect to Views can be placed in private groups only accessible by the user who created them or in groups shared with other users 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 156 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Use views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed Create special views for widescreen monitors Use multiple screens as well as floating windows for displaying different views simultaneously Quickly substitute one or more of a vi
180. ements for the surveillance system server Note however that to run the NetPDA NetCell Server the following is also required on the surveillance system server Internet Information Services IIS 5 0 or later Microsoft Net Framework 1 1 Note that later versions of Net Framework may also be present on the server If Net Framework 1 1 as well as one or more later versions are present on the server Windows default settings may cause a later Net Framework version to be used instead of Net Framework 1 1 To verify change which Net Framework version is used do the following 1 Click Start and select Control Panel 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 7 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 2 Click Administrative Tools 3 Click Internet Information Services 4 In the Internet Information Services window s left pane locate and right click the Default Web Site item Example only content on your server may be different 5 In the resulting menu select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog 6 Select the dialog s ASP NET tab The Net Framework in use will be indicated in the ASP NET version field 7 If required change the ASP NET version to 1 1 4322 Example only 8 Click OK 9 Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open 222 Route 59 S
181. ems Inc If the mouse pointer changes to crosshairs when positioned in the hot spot you are able to control the PTZ camera by clicking in the hot spot Crosshairs The PTZ camera will center on the point you click If you click and hold down the left mouse button then move the mouse up or down you will get access to a zoom slider For some cameras crosshairs surrounded by a square may be displayed When this is the case you are able to zoom in on an area by dragging a square around the required area in the hot spot For such cameras zoom level is controlled by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down this will display a zoom level slider inside the hot spot PTZ Patrolling and PTZ on Event PTZ cameras may be set up to move automatically either according to a scheme PTZ patrolling or when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application With PTZ patrolling the PTZ camera will automatically move between preset positions With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For example the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened If PTZ patrolling is enabled for the selected PTZ camera you can pause PTZ patrolling for the camera by clicking the PTZ Menu s Pause Patrol button The button is only available for PTZ cameras for which PTZ pat
182. en this is the case the background cameras can be accessed by relevant users through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS since access to these clients can be flexibly restricted through the ImageServer Administrator window Important Guidelines for Using Background Cameras Since background cameras are not displayed in the Monitor application it may occasionally be difficult to determine how many cameras are running Therefore when using background cameras always bear in mind that a maximum of 64 cameras at a time can be running on the server regardless of whether they are running in the Monitor application or running through remote activation of background cameras For background cameras to work the Allow cameras to run in the background check box in the Advanced section of the General Settings window must be selected For background cameras to work they must be enabled see description of the Administrator window s Device Manager section Even if no cameras are included in the Monitor application remember that camera images are only transferred to NetDVR while the recording server in this case the Monitor application is running The Monitor application must therefore run whenever you want to record images from cameras on your surveillance system A running Monitor is also a prerequisite for viewing live images in the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 T
183. end SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the Generic Events window 4 In the Generic Events window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the Generic item to see the listing Click OK to close the Generic Event window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the generic event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVR Tip See also How to Test a Generic Event Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Once you have added a generic event see How to Add a Generic Event a quick and easy way to test your generic event is to first set up an event notification and then use Telnet to send a small amount of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification What is Telnet Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet For this example we have created a generic event called Video Our generic event simply
184. ent to the selected device provided a VMD event has not already been defined for the device Multi camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will open a simple dialog in which you select the required camera This way you are able to define a VMD event for each camera on a multi camera device Edit selected Lets you edit the settings for an item selected in the Defined events list For devices capable of handling a single input event only the button will open the Edit Event window for editing input events 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 71 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc For devices capable of handling several input events the button will open the Multiple Input Events window If the selected item is a timer event the button will open the New Timer window If the selected item is an output the button will open the Edit Output window Remove selected Lets you remove an event selected in the Defined events list Note The selected event will be removed without further warning Advanced Opens the Advanced window in which you are able to specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling which ports to use for FTP alerts and SMTP input output events as well as which polling frequency to use on devices requiring polling Note Access to features in the Admini
185. ent to the selected device unless the selected device is a video server see below o If the selected device is a video server several cameras may be attached to the device and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera When ready click OK 3 In the I O Setup window your newly defined VMD event will now be listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 102 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Click OK to close the I O Setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the VMD event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVR Tip For video server devices you are able to define a VMD event for each connected camera simply repeat above process Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights NetDVR is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to easily integrate your NetDVR surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received
186. ents occur within specific periods of time You are also able to specify if e mail alerts SMS alerts or sound alerts should be triggered if motion is detected during specific periods of time If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if a certain patrol scheme should be used during specific periods of time By default cameras added to NetDVR will automatically be online and you will only need to modify the Camera Alert Scheduler window s settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want to use specific alerts or PTZ patrol schemes Note however that this default may be changed by clearing the General Settings window s Create Default schedule for new cameras check box If the check box is cleared subsequently added cameras will not automatically be online in which case online schedules must be specified manually Access To access the Camera Alert Scheduler window click the Scheduler button in the Administrator window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 53 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Camera Alert Scheduler window Camera Alert Scheduler Window s Fields and Check Boxes The Camera Alert Scheduler Window features the following fields and check boxes Field Check Box Description Camera Lets you select a particular camera for which to spe
187. enu bar For example you may store one view displaying images from 16 cameras and another view displaying images from eight other cameras Storing a View To store your current camera layout as a view do the following 1 In the Viewer s menu bar select the Views menu 2 In the Views menu select the Add to Views command This will open the Name of View window The Name of View window 3 In the Name of View window specify a name for the view and click OK 4 The view will now be selectable in the Views menu If storing several different configurations of the camera layout as views you will thus be able to switch between them using the Views menu Recalling a View To recall a stored view simply select the required view in the Views menu Editing or Deleting a Stored View To edit or delete stored views select Organize Views in the Views menu This will open the Views control panel in which you are able to rename views change the sequence in which stored views appear in the menu and delete views To print evidence from the Viewer use the following procedure 1 Select the required camera in the camera layout see Using the Viewer and browse to the image you want to print 2 Click the Print icon The Print icon This will open the Print control panel 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 139 Monitor Application On N
188. equired Export Path if you keep the default setting the files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop b Select whether timestamps from the surveillance system should be added to the exported JPGs c Click Next to start the export Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content You are able to view archived recordings in the Viewer alternatively use the NetGuard EVS You are able to use all of Viewer s features browsing smart search evidence export etc for archived recordings as well Viewing Recordings from Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply use the Viewer s browsing features for example the timeline browser or the playback controls for finding and viewing the required recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a camera s regular database Viewing Recordings from Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on a CD you click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required a
189. er 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information External output name Lets you edit the name of the output Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 79 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Advanced window lets you specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling The Advanced window Access You access the Advanced window by clicking the Advanced button in the I O Setup window Advanced Window s Fields The Advanced window contains the following fields Field Description Ftp Server Port Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via FTP Default port is port 21 Alert Port Lets you specify port number to use for
190. erAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Note The UserName parameter is relevant only for the authentication methods Windows authentication and Basic authentication You use the AuthenticationType parameter described in the following to control which authentication method to use Password Refers to a specific password The following example would show the NetGuard EVS client s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Tommy in the dialog s User name field and T0mMy5Pa55w0rD in the dialog s Password field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password T0mMy5Pa55w0rD Note The Password parameter is only relevant if using the authentication methods Windows authentication and Basic authentication You use the AuthenticationType parameter described in the following to control which authentication method to use AuthenticationType Refers to one of NetGuard EVS client s three possible authentication methods Windows authentication current user called WindowsDefault in startup scripts Windows authentication called Windows in startup scripts or Basic authentication called Simple in the startup scripts The following example would show the NetGuard EVS client s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Basic authentication selected in the dialog s Authentication field Tommy in the dialog s User name field and T0mMy5Pa55w0rD masked by asterisks
191. erent window the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only will open when the Add new event button is clicked Multiple Input Events Window s Fields and Buttons The Multiple Input Events window contains the following fields and buttons Field Description Input events for device Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input events are defined Available Input Event s Lists available input events for the device typically with an input event for rising and falling signals on each of the device s input ports For exact information about what constitutes the various input events refer to documentation for the sensors and device in question My list contains event related to motion and or object detection what s this Some devices have their own capabilities for detecting motion and or moving static objects A motion or object detection related input event is very likely to be an option from such a device The settings determining this kind of detection are configured on the device itself typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address For more information refer to the documentation for the device in question Enabled Input Event s Lists enabled input events for the device You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button See description in the following gt g
192. ernatively to quickly determine whether any views have already been created and placed in shared groups do the following Note This method requires that your user rights permit you to access the NetGuard client s Live tab and or Browse tab Most users will have access to at least one of these tabs 1 Go to the NetGuard client s Live or Browse tab 2 On the Live or Browse tab look at the Views section 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 199 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc If the Views section contains any expandable folders labeled Shared shared groups are available and you may your user rights permitting begin using the views in the shared groups for viewing live and recorded images See Viewing Live Images and Viewing Recorded Images Only if you want to add more views e g customize your NetGuard with views in private groups do you need to create further views on the Setup tab If the Views section contains no expandable folders at all no views are available and you must create at least one view on the Setup tab before you can begin using the NetGuard If the Views section contains one or more expandable folders labeled Private you have already created one or more views in private groups Which Types of Groups are You Able to Create Views in Depending on your user rights you may be able to cr
193. ers to switch between views In the following example we have kept the two groups and two views from the previous example Instead of using buttons we have created an HTML page with an image of a floor plan and created an image map based on the floor plan Viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this HTML page with image map for navigating between views How you structure and create an image map is of course highly individual For this example we divided the floor plan into colored zones and defined an image map area for each zone This way users will be able to simply click a zone in order to go to the view displaying cameras from that zone For instance the red zone on our image map mirrors the Change to Group2 View2 button from the previous example When clicking the red zone users will go to View2 in Group2 Importing the HTML Page Importing an HTML page for navigation is no different from importing any other type of HTML page into a view in the NetGuard The important thing to remember is that the HTML page should be stored locally on the user s PC To import an HTML page go to the NetGuard client s Setup tab From the Setup tab s System Overview section drag the HTML Page link to the required position in the required view This will open the Import HTML Page dialog in which you specify the required HTML page You are also able to specify a title for it the title will appear in the title bar of the HTML page when displayed in
194. esponds to camera channel 1 second line from the top corresponds to camera channel 2 etc To change camera settings select the required camera channel from the list specify required information in the following fields and click the Apply button Field Description Camera Name Name used to identify the selected camera Existing names such as the default camera names Camera 1 Camera 2 etc can be changed by overwriting the existing names Note Camera names must be unique for each device Cam Number Users of the NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Cam Number field A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 123456789 It is highly recommended that you use a unique camera shortcut number for each camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or the NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 22 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance System
195. et Surveillance Systems Inc The Print control panel 3 Fill in the Operator s Note Company and Operator fields 4 Click the Print button to print the evidence on your default Windows printer The printed surveillance report will contain the selected image information about camera name image capture time and report print time as well as the specified operator s name and operator s note To send evidence from the Viewer via e mail use the following procedure Note The e mail feature must be set up by the surveillance system administrator before you can use it Ask if in doubt 1 Select the required camera in the camera layout see Using the Viewer and browse to the image you want to send via e mail 2 Click the Send E mail Report icon The Send E mail Report icon This will open the E mail Report control panel The E mail Report control panel 3 Type the e mail address of the recipient If sending to several recipients separate e mail addresses with a semicolon example aa aa aa bb bb bb 4 Type a subject text for the e mail 5 Verify that the Image field lists the camera you require 6 Type a message typically a description of the recorded incident 7 Click the Send button You are able to export entire video and audio sequences in three different formats AVI file movie clip Database files you can include the Viewer itself in the export so others can easily view the database files J
196. ew s cameras with other cameras View images from several cameras one after the other in a single camera spot a so called carousel View video from selected cameras in greater magnification and or higher quality in a designated hotspot Receive and send video through NetMatrix Include HTML pages and static images e g maps or photos in views Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX 360 view cameras Use digital zoom on live as well as recorded video Activate manually triggered events Activate external outputs e g sirens or lights Use sound notifications for attracting attention to detected motion or events Get quick overviews of sequences with detected motion Get quick overviews of detected alerts or events Quickly search selected areas of video recordings for motion also known as smart search Skip gaps during playback of recordings Configure and use several different joysticks Print images with optional comments Copy images for subsequent pasting into word processors e mail etc Export recordings e g for use as evidence in AVI movie clip JPEG still image and surveillance system database formats The database format can include audio Use pre configured as well as customizable keyboard shortcuts to speed up common actions Select between a number of language versions independent of langua
197. fied for individual cameras Example Expanded Defined Event list A global event button with an associated timer event has been specified Also two event buttons have been specified for an individual camera Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events To specify an event button first determine whether you want the event button to be available globally or for a particular camera only Note Only eight event buttons can be displayed at a time in the Monitor application When specifying event buttons for individual cameras bear in mind that global event buttons are displayed for all cameras If you have already defined for example three global event buttons you will be able to specify a maximum of five event buttons for each individual camera before you reach the maximum of eight displayable event buttons In the NetGuard EVS users select manually triggered events from a list rather than by clicking event buttons The NetGuard EVSis thus able to display an unlimited number of events for manual triggering for simplicity reasons also referred to here as event buttons Specifying Global Event Buttons To specify a global event button select the Global entry at the top of the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked Whe
198. g Out To log out of the NetGuard EVS simply click the Log Out button in the NetGuard EVS client s top bar 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 195 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetGuard The NetGuard provides remote users with feature rich access to the surveillance system It lets users access multiple servers at a time allowing remote user access across systems The NetGuard may either be installed locally on the remote user s computer or it may be accessed through the internet and run from the NetDVR server Tip See system requirements for the NetGuard under System Requirements What are Remote Users Able to do with the NetGuard With the NetGuard remote users are able to View live images from cameras on the surveillance system Browse recordings from cameras on the surveillance system Create and switch between an unlimited number of views each able to display images from up to 16 cameras from multiple servers at a time Views can placed in private groups only accessible by the user who created them or shared groups accessible by all NetGuard users connected to the NetDVR server Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX 360 view cameras Activate external outputs Get quick overviews of sequences with detected motion Print images Generate and export evidence in AVI
199. g folder located under C videodata recordings from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video server device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C videodata Archives 00408c51e181_2 2005 06 01 23 15 If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video server device with several channels the video server channel indication in the subdirectory named after the device s MAC address will always be _1 Example 00408c51e181_1 Is audio archived too If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video server with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 Set all Selects the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Set all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should apply for all cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Clear all Clears the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Clear all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should not apply for any of the cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually disabled for the selected cameras Set all paths Copies the selected pat
200. g in to the NetGuard EVS on the computer on which you created your multiple window setup Unfortunately you cannot log in to a NetGuard EVS on another computer and expect to use your multiple window setup on the other computer as well The simple reason for this is that not all computers have extra displays attached If you want to use multiple windows with the NetGuard EVS on more than one computer you must therefore configure your multiple window setup on each computer Frequently Asked Questions about Multiple Windows How many secondary displays can I use In the NetGuard EVS there is no limitation as such However the number of secondary displays you are able to use is likely to depend on your hardware display adapters etc and your Windows version I want to close a view sent to Primary Display or a Secondary Display where is the Close button In order to allow the maximum possible viewing area the blue top bar of a view sent to Primary Display or a Secondary Display is hidden To show the top bar and get access to the Close button simply move your mouse pointer to the very top of the view I watch the same carousel in two different windows why is it out of sync A carousel changes cameras at a specific interval configured on the Setup tab Example With an interval of 10 seconds the carousel will show Camera 1 for 10 seconds then Camera 2 for 10 seconds etc The timing begins when you start watching a view containing the carous
201. g the Software for more information about the installation differences Logfile Settings The Logfile Settings section lets you specify where to keep the general log files containing information about activity in the Administrator and recording server and how long for Separate log files are generated for the Administrator and recording server Furthermore separate types of recording server log files are generated depending on whether the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application or as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Logfile Path By default the Administrator and recording server log files are stored in the folder containing the NetDVR software To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Logfile Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Log A new log file is created every day A log file older than the number of days specified in the Days to log field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to log field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the Days to log field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 Tip Read more about NetDVR logging in About Logging 2
202. ge used on main surveillance system Note Some of the above features may require certain user rights Some of the above features may only be available if supported by the surveillance system see Surveillance System Differences How can User Rights Affect Day to Day Use of the NetGuard EVS The rights of individual remote users are specified centrally by the surveillance system administrator The rights of an individual user will determine the user s ability to use the NetGuard EVS client s features Basically the surveillance system administrator is able to restrict a user s rights to the following Access to the NetGuard EVS Access to each of the NetGuard EVS client s tabs Live Browse and Setup Ability to use features on the NetGuard EVS client s tabs Ability to create views views determine the way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed Ability to view images from specific cameras 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 157 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The ability to use various features of the NetGuard EVS may therefore vary considerably from user to user Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights Download Installation amp Login Logging in to the NetGuard EVS is very straightforward So is the initial configuration of the NetGuard EVS upon your first
203. ggered and an e mail alert is sent to relevant people Event buttons can be global available for all cameras included in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Event Buttons window lets you specify buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity When specified event buttons become available in the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS in the NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list Event buttons can be global available for all cameras in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor The Event Buttons window Access You access the Event Buttons window by clicking the Event Buttons button in the Administrator window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 81 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Defined Events List The Event Buttons window features a list of specified event buttons When event buttons have been defined you are able to expand elements in the list by clicking to get an overview of all defined event buttons global event buttons as well as event buttons speci
204. h listing to all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section If using the same archiving directory for all cameras this can save you having to manually specify identical paths for each camera Example You have specified the path C videodata for a camera To quickly use this path for all cameras select the path listing and click the Set all paths button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 121 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Cameras Not Included in the Monitor Application Installation dependent feature The following information is relevant only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the following information is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences When the recording server has been installed as the Monitor application it is possible to let some or all of the cameras connected to a NetDVR server run in the background i e without the cameras being included in the Monitor application itself For such background cameras the features of the Monitor application will not be immediately available although recorded images from such cameras can still be browsed in the Monitor ap
205. handling event based alerts including generic events Default port is port 1234 SMTP Port Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via SMTP Default port is port 25 Polling Frequency 1 10 sec For a small number of devices primarily I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The Polling Frequency field lets you specify the interval between state checks Interval is specified in tenths of a second Default value is 10 tenths of a second i e one second For I O devices it is highly recommended that the polling frequency is set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which devices require polling see the release note 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 80 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Event Buttons Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Event buttons are configurable buttons allowing users to manually trigger events from the Monitor application only available if the recording server
206. has been installed as an application rather than a service and NetGuard EVS In the NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list You are able to configure event buttons to suit the exact needs of your organization Your main entry point for configuring event buttons is the Administrator window Clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button will open the Event Buttons window in which you specify each individual event button Event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes for example As start and stop events for use in the Camera Alert Scheduler window For example you can make a camera start or stop transferring images to the surveillance system when an event button is clicked in the Monitor As start and stop events for use in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window For example you can make a camera use a higher frame rate when an event button is clicked in the Monitor or you can use an event button for manually triggering PTZ preset positions on event For triggering outputs Particular outputs can be associated with the clicking of an event button you do this in the I O Control window For triggering event based e mail and or SMS alerts In combinations For example the clicking of an event button could make a camera start transferring images to the surveillance system while two outputs are tri
207. hat you want to delete the selected view or group 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 165 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Using Your Views on Different Computers Your user settings including information about your views are stored centrally on the surveillance system server This means that you are able to use your views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed provided you log in to the NetGuard EVS with your own user name and password Tip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views Note From time to time your surveillance system administrator may make changes to camera or user properties on the surveillance system When this is the case such changes will take effect in the NetGuard EVS the first time you log in after the changes were made Such changes may occasionally require you to re create your views Ask your system administrator if in doubt Once you have created views in the NetGuard EVS you are able to add content to the views Note Your ability to edit views including adding content to the views depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view you are also able to edit it Content can be video from individual cameras carousels for viewing images from alternating cameras in a single view position a hotsp
208. he Browse link to browse for the required HTML page 3 In the Title field you are able to specify a title for the HTML page The title will appear in blue title bar above the HTML page itself when it is displayed in the view 4 Select scaling for the HTML page either No scaling default or the required scaling 640 480 800 600 1024 768 or 1280 1024 5 Click the OK link Renaming Groups To rename a group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required group in the Views section 2 In the Group Control section overwrite the existing name in the Group Name field 3 Click the Rename button Deleting Groups Note Deleting a group will delete all views within the group as well To delete a group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required group in the Views section 2 In the Group Control section click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the group and all of its views Renaming Views To rename a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view in the Views section 2 In the View Control section overwrite the existing name in the View Name field 3 Click the Rename button Deleting Views To delete a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view in the Views section 2 In the View Control section click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the view Adjusti
209. he period to be covered by the export should start You do this by typing the required date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field Tip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set buttons This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image in the Start Time fields 3 In the End Time fields specify end date and time for the export You may use the Set button as described above 4 Select the required camera from the Source list You must select an individual camera from the list as your source the Current View Sources option only applies when exporting in the database format 5 Click the AVI JPEG Export button This will open a separate export dialog The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and camera 6 In the export dialog s Export Type section select the required export format AVI movie clip or JPEG still images 7 Select whether to add timestamps from the surveillance system to the exported images If selected small timestamps will appear in the corner of the images 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 186 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example of timestamp arrow indicates actual position Date and time format may
210. he required view This will bring up a menu 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 192 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 2 In the menu select Send View To gt Primary Display Sending a View to a Secondary Display Sending a view to a Secondary Display will show the view in a full screen window on another physical display if available The other physical display will only show the selected view none of the Live or Browse tab s other features and it can only show one view at a time Any hotspots carousels NetMatrix positions still images or HTML pages included in the view will work as usual Example of an 8 8 view sent to a Secondary Display In this example the main NetGuard EVS window is available on the left display To send a view to a Secondary Display do the following 1 In the Live or Browse tab s Views section right click the required view This will bring up a menu 2 In the menu select Send View To gt Secondary Display If more than one secondary display is available they will be numbered Sending a View to a Floating Window Sending a view to a Floating Window will show the view in a small separate window on your main display The floating window will only show the selected view none of the Live or Browse tab s other features A floating window can only show one view at a time but you can use any number of f
211. hen click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list which lists all outputs to be automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera Good to know You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVR system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for manual triggering in the Monitor as well as NetGuard and NetGuard EVS This is further described in How to Add a Manually Controlled Output 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 116 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the selected camera Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your moti
212. hing else Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field but may also have more content Example If you have specified that the received package should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the received package contains the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday as your required terms are contained in the received package Event priority The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between 0 lowest priority and 1000 highest priority When NetDVR receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority e g two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 87 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems I
213. ht Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click Ceiling Mounted Cameras If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust the behavior of the navigation buttons to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling Mount check box Setting a View as Home Position When previewing the IPIX rendered view you are able to set a particular position in the IPIX rendered view as the camera s PTZ home position Navigate to the required position using the navigation buttons then click the Set View as Home Position button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 48 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Image Resolution Image resolution values are automatically displayed in the lower part of the window next to the navigation buttons When using IPIX image resolution will automatically be set to the highest available resolution The Camera Name and Number window lets you edit the name of a selected camera and if required assign a shortcut number to the selected camera Access You access the Camera Name and Number window from the Administrator window s device Manager section Right click the name of the required camera then select Edit from the menu that appears The Camera Name and Number window contains two fields Field Description Camera Name Displays the name of the camera If required you are able to
214. ht of the frame rate fields Camera Monitor Setup In the Camera Monitor Setup section you are able to specify how images from the camera are displayed primarily when viewed in the Monitor application Field Description Show Motion Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected detected motion will be highlighted in the camera s images when viewed in the Monitor 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 25 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Motion highlighted in green when viewed in Monitor Tip You are able to select the motion detection highlight color by clicking the Motion Color button in the Motion Detection Settings section Show Regions Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected areas in which motion detec
215. ication On Net Surveillance Systems Inc I O Control Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In the I O Control window you are able associate particular events and event buttons with one or more particular outputs This way you are able to define that when a selected event occurs or when a particular event button is clicked one or more selected outputs will be triggered Note Use of features in the I O Control window requires that events and outputs have been specified see About Input Events amp Output The I O Control window Access You access the I O Control window from the Administrator window by clicking the I O Control button Associating Events with Particular Outputs When associating an event with one or more outputs you are able to select between all outputs defined on the NetDVR system you are not limited to selecting outputs defined on a particular device To associate a particular event with a particular output do the following 1 Select the required event in the Available Events list in the left side of the I O Control window Tip Events as well as event buttons may be listed Tip When you select an event or event button in the Available Events list you can view detailed information about the selected event or event button under Event Information in the lower part of the window 2 Select the required outp
216. icient number of positions are available in the view Tip You can easily change which cameras are included in your view Either clear an individual camera position by clicking the clear button then drag another camera to the cleared position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 166 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Adding Carousels A carousel is used for displaying images from several cameras one after the other in a single view position You are able to specify which cameras to include in the carousel as well as the interval between camera changes To add a carousel to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Carousel link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position Tip Note that the position gets a thin green border The green border indicates that the position is used for a carousel the green border will also be evident when using the view on the Browse and Live tabs Thin green border indicates carousel 3 When the carousel position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section Begin by selecting which cameras to include in the carousel In the following example we have selected four cameras Note that you are
217. icking the gt gt button in the Multiple Input Events window Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check NetDVR release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events contains the following fields Field Check Box Description External event name Lets you specify a name for the particular input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send email if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS setti
218. ickly jump to a specific point in time Specify required date in the first field and required time in the second field then click the Go link Sequences The Browse tab s Sequences section provides you with an overview of recorded sequences for the camera selected in the view To use the Sequences section select the required camera in the view then click the Sequences section s Get Sequences button Clicking the Get Sequences button will retrieve a list of up to 40 sequences 20 sequences prior to the point in time displayed in the view and 20 sequences following the point in time displayed in the view Each sequence will be listed with date and time as well as the length of the sequence Clicking a sequence in the list will move all images in the view to the time of the sequence If the Preview check box is selected you are able to quickly view each sequence by placing the mouse pointer over the required sequence in the list Clicking the expand icon next to a sequence in the list will show you the exact date and time of the first and last image in the sequence as well as the exact date and time of the motion detection event etc triggering the recording Sequences may often begin some seconds before a motion detection event etc and end some seconds after This so called buffer allows you to be able to see what happens immediately before and after an incident the buffer length is determined by the system administrator Expanded sequence
219. id red Lights up when motion is detected in the image Click anywhere inside the image to reset the motion indicator Online indicator the rightmost of the three indicators blinking green Changes state every time an image is received from the camera Hot Spot If enabled in the Administrator application a hot spot provides you with an enlarged view of images from a selected camera When enabled the hot spot can either appear inside the camera layout or as a separate floating window If the hot spot is located inside the camera layout simply click inside an image to select the camera from which you want to view images in the hot spot If the hot spot runs in a separate floating window you will see a HotSpot button in the Monitor s control panel When this is the case simply click the HotSpot button to open the separate hot spot window A hot spot in a separate floating window otherwise works just like a hot spot located inside the camera layout Tip The hot spot may also be used for point and click operations on some PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Hot Spot with Carousel Depending on hot spot configuration in the Administrator application the hot spot may automatically display images from all cameras available in the camera layout one after the other with specified intervals This is known as a carousel When this feature has been enabled a Carousel button appears in the Monitor s control panel To toggle the carouse
220. ied by you The default archiving directory is located on the computer running the NetDVR software by default in the directory containing the NetDVR software In the archiving directory separate sub directories for storing archives for each camera are automatically created These sub directories are named after the MAC address of the device to which the camera is connected Since you are able to keep archives spanning many days of recordings further sub directories named after the archiving date and time are also automatically created The sub directories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoServerChannel DateAndTime Example With the default archiving folder located under C videodata images from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video server device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C videodata Archives 00408c51e181_2 2005 06 01 23 15 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 117 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video server device with several channels the video server channel indication in the sub directory named after the device s MAC address will always be _1 Example e g 00408c51e181_1 Storing Archives at Other Locatio
221. ient and NetPDA NetCell Server Enable remote access to the NetDVR surveillance system via a PDA Personal Digital Assistant a hand held computer device with a wireless connection NetMatrix Integrated product enabling control of live camera views on remote computers for distributed viewing Once configured NetMatrix triggered live video can be viewed NetGuard EVS or on computers with the NetMatrix Monitor client application installed 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 5 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Updates OnSSI regularly releases service updates for its products offering improved functionality and support for new devices If you are an OnSSI system administrator it is recommended that you check the OnSSI website www OnSSI com for updates at regular intervals in order to make sure you are using the most recent version of OnSSI Software Upgrade Plan SUP As the cornerstone of its support to customers OnSSI offers a Software Upgrade Plan SUP The purpose of the SUP is to provide you with lower cost alternative to standard Software upgrades SUP coverage can easily be purchased together with most new OnSSI products but cannot be purchased as an addon to a previously purchased product During the period covered by the SUP customers are entitled to receive all generally released new versions of their OnSSI software includi
222. iewing still images from the selected camera click the Still link in the live view Playback Note Certain user rights may be required in order to use this feature Switches to playback view for the selected camera Playback view lets you play back recorded images from the selected camera based on a date and time you specify in the playback view The pause and start buttons in the playback view lets you pause and start the live feed as required To return to viewing still images from the selected camera click the Still link in the playback view Build AVI file Note Certain user rights may be required in order to use this feature Starts a wizard with which you are able to create and export an AVI movie clip of selected recordings Such movie clips may for example be used as evidence Print Lets you print the currently viewed image A time stamp will automatically be included with the print You are furthermore able to include your name and a comment if required Go To Lets you jump straight to images from a date and time specified in the field above the Go To button Quad View The Quad View menu section is used for viewing live images from up to four cameras at a time Example of quad view You are able to create and save up to ten different quad views To save a quad view click the Save Setup link at the top of the quad view in question Tip You are able to give each saved quad view a name of your choice Type the require
223. iews are placed in folders called groups A group can contain any number of views Groups in turn can be private or shared Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the user who created them whereas views placed in shared groups can be accessed by all NetGuard users connected to the NetDVR server Simplified example of views in private and shared groups Before you create any views it is important that you know the difference between views placed in shared and private groups not least because a number of views may already have been created and placed in shared groups for NetGuard users in your organization When that is the case you can start using your NetGuard straight away creating further views in your NetGuard will not be necessary unless you want to supplement the views in the shared groups with views of your own placed in private groups If you want to create views yourself for example if no views in shared groups are available in your organization the NetGuard client s Setup tab lets you create groups and views and specify which cameras should be included in each view Are Any Views in Shared Groups Available Especially if you are a first time user of the NetGuard you will want to know whether any views have already been created and placed in shared groups for your organization s NetGuard users Typically your surveillance system administrator will have told you if shared groups are used in your organization Alt
224. ifferent patrol schemes For example a PTZ camera in a supermarket may patrol according to one patrol scheme during opening hours and according to another patrol scheme when the supermarket is closed The Patrol scheme list lets you select which patrol scheme to configure Defining a New Patrol Scheme To define a new patrol scheme click the New button This will add a New patrol scheme listing to the Patrol scheme list To change the name from New patrol scheme to a name of your choice select the New patrol scheme listing and click the Rename button Copying an Existing Patrol Scheme If you want to create a new patrol scheme based on an existing one you can copy the existing patrol scheme To copy an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Copy button This will add a copy of the selected patrol scheme to the list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 44 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The copy will initially be named Copy of Patrol Scheme Name To change the name to a name of your choice select the Copy of Patrol Scheme Name listing and click the Rename button Renaming an Existing Patrol Scheme To change the name of an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Rename button Removing an Existing Patr
225. ify a name for the required output event which of the device s output ports to use and how long to keep the output for Add VMD Event Motion Detection Lets you add a VMD Video Motion Detection event to the device selected in the Defined Events list VMD events are events triggered when NetDVR detects motion on a specific camera based on the motion detection settings defined in the Adjust Motion Detection window Note In addition to NetDVR s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device VMD events can be used just like regular input events For example a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera could move to a specific preset position when a VMD event occurs Only one VMD event can be defined per camera In order to avoid the risk of an excessively high number of VMD events being generated a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds The Add VMD Event Motion Detection button works slightly different depending on whether the selected device is a single camera device or a multi camera device such as a video server Single camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will instantly add a VMD ev
226. imply means Video Motion Detection Once the VMD event is defined you will be able to select it when further configuring NetDVR Note In addition to NetDVR s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device Note Your motion detection settings for the camera in question will entirely determine when motion is detected and thus when the VMD event will occur See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information Also note that in order not to generate an excessively high number of VMD events during periods with lots of motion a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 101 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To add a VMD event do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for the event to occur then click the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button This will automatically add a VMD ev
227. in the dialog s Password field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password T0mMy5Pa55w0rD AuthenticationType Simple From the user s point of view the called login dialog would look like this 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 184 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc If we were to use Windows authentication the example would be Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password T0mMy5Pa55w0rD AuthenticationType Windows If we were to use Windows authentication current user the UserName and Password parameters would not be necessary and the example would look like this Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver AuthenticationType WindowsDefault Script Refers to a full path to an scs script a script type targeted at controlling the NetGuard EVS The following example uses an scs script to login Client exe Script c startup scs Example of an scs script for logging in to http ourserver with the current Windows user lt ScriptEngine gt lt Login gt lt ServerAddress gt http ourserver lt ServerAddress gt lt AuthenticationType gt WindowsDefault lt AuthenticationType gt lt Login gt lt ScriptEngine gt You are able to use many of the NetGuard EVS client s function calls see Viewing a List of Possible Function Calls elsewhere in this topic to add further functi
228. indication Date and time format may be different on your computer PTZ Control The Browse tab s PTZ Control section lets you navigate recorded images from IPIX cameras IPIX is a technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images Note The Browse tab s PTZ Control section cannot be used for controlling PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras as the Browse tab is used for viewing already recorded images Point and Click Control Many IPIX cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and clicking inside the images from the camera If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the images from an IPIX camera point and click control is supported for the camera Refer to the release note for information about point and click support 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 212 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc PTZ Navigation Buttons As an alternative to point and click IPIX control use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move around the view from the selected IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e default position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively PTZ Preset Positions The Presets list does not apply for navigating recorded images from IPIX cameras IPIX PTZ Preset Positions You are able to move to a specific pos
229. indows User button This will open the Select Users or Groups window Note that you will only be able to make selections from the local computer even if you click the Locations button 2 In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user name s then use the Check Names feature to verify that the user name s you have entered are correct Note If typing several user names separate each name with a semicolon Example Brian Hannah Karen Sean 3 When ready click OK The required users and will be imported and listed in the User administration window A user imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory User in the list s Type 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 152 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc column The user will furthermore be indicated by a user icon without the blue dot used for Basic users Example When a user who has been added this way logs in with a NetGuard EVS the user should not specify any server name PC name or IP address as part of the user name Example of a correctly specified user name USER001 Example of an incorrectly specified user name PC001 USER001 The user should of course still specify a password and any required server information How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password Editing an existing user s user name or password is only possible if the use
230. ing scheme This will affect the way you zoom in and out with PTZ camera Default values Resets axes settings letting you use the joystick s default axes settings Joystick Buttons Section The Joystick Buttons section lets you specify which joystick buttons should be used for particular actions To assign an action to a particular joystick button select the required action in the list then click the required joystick button When a button is assigned to an action the name of the button will be listed together with the name of the action To stop using a particular joystick button for a particular action select the button action in the list then click the Unselect button To free all joystick buttons from their associated actions click the Unselect All button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The E Mail setup window lets you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur By default SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used when sending e mail alerts Compared with other mail transfer methods SMTP has the advantage that you will avoid automatically triggered warnings from your e mail client when an e mail alert is to be sent Such automatically triggered warnings may other
231. ing server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences With the MPEG standard keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 60 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc the camera whereas the following frames record only pixels that change If selected only MPEG keyframes will be decoded and displayed in the Monitor application Note that all frames from the MPEG stream will be stored in the camera database regardless of whether keyframe only decoding is selected or not Disable Online Indicator Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Turns off the blinking green online indicator normally displayed for each camera in the Monitor application Keep Aspect Ratio Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theR
232. inistration section 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 221 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Web Server Setup The Settings window s Web Server setup section contains the following fields Field Description HTTP port Indicates the port used by the Web Server Default is port 81 Field is editable only when the Web Server is stopped Auto Start The Web Server must be started before it is active and remote users are able to connect to it The Auto Start check box lets you enable automatic start of the Web Server With automatic start enabled the Web Server will start automatically when you click the Web Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon The use of Auto Start is recommended When automatic start is not enabled you must start the Web Server manually by clicking the Start server button in the NetDVR Web Server window You access the NetDVR Web Server window by clicking the Web Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar Log Activity to File Select check box to log Web server activity in a log file The log file will be stored in the directory in which the NetDVR software is installed Days to log Available only if Log Activity to File check box is selected Lets you specify the number of days in which log files should be kept before they
233. intain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected images will not be stretched to fit the size of the camera position Rather images will be displayed with the aspect ratio with which they have been recorded This may result in horizontal or vertical black bars appearing around the images from some cameras If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the position in the view this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images Example The same image viewed with Maintain Image Aspect Ratio selected left and cleared right Only Update Image on Motion If selected the camera s images will only be updated on the NetGuard EVS client s Live tab when motion is detected Depending on the camera s motion detection sensitivity configured on the surveillance system server this can help reduce CPU usage significantly If the camera s images are only updated on motion users will see the message No motion together with a still image in the camera s view position until motion is detected Sound on Motion Detection When images from the camera are viewed on the Live tab it is possible to get a simple sound notification when motion is detected Always off Do not use sound notifications on detected motion Always on Play a sound notification each time motion is detected on the camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 ww
234. iods 56 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 1 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Good to Know when You Set Patrolling Periods 56 Colored Bars 57 General Settings 58 Changing the Administrator Password 58 Restricting Users Rights 58 Logfile Path 59 Days to Log 59 Path
235. ion On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Monitor application configured in the Monitor Manager window the camera cannot be disabled When this is the case remove the camera from the Monitor Manager window s layout before disabling the camera Tip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Administrator window s Device Manager section Audio Source In the Audio source section you are able to associate an audio source with the selected camera Note The ability to associate an audio source with the selected camera requires that at least one audio source has been attached to a device on the surveillance system When an audio source is associated with a camera audio from the source will automatically be presented when images from the camera are viewed Note that you are able to select an audio source attached to another device than the selected camera To associate an audio source with the selected camera simply select the required audio source from the list For cameras attached to the same device as an audio source the source is automatically selected and cannot be changed Image Storage Settings The Image storage settings section lets you specify when images received from the camera should be stored in the database You specify this information in the following fields Field Description When to store images in database Select when images received from the camera should be stored in the database Always
236. ion must therefore run whenever you want to be able to record images and audio from cameras on your surveillance system A running Monitor is also a prerequisite for viewing live recordings in remote access applications The Monitor application cannot run if the Administrator application is already running close down the Administrator application before running the Monitor application Once the Monitor application is running you can run the Administrator application as required Accessing the Monitor Access You access the Monitor application by double clicking the Monitor desktop shortcut When you start the Monitor all cameras scheduled to be online will start transferring images to NetDVR Scheduling is handled by the system administrator in the Administrator application However even if a camera is not scheduled to be online users with sufficient user rights can start a camera i e make it transfer images to NetDVR from the Monitor by using the Monitor s Manual Mode feature See further information in the description of the Monitor s control panel The Monitor application opens in full screen view This provides you with the best possible view of the camera images displayed The Monitor basically consists of two sections a camera layout section in which camera images are displayed and a control panel with buttons for controlling the various features of the Monitor Monitor s Camera Layout The Monitor s camera layout section display
237. irmware used I O Setup Window s Defined Events List and Buttons The I O Setup window features a Defined events list in which input output and VMD Video Motion Detection events defined for each device are listed The window furthermore features a number of buttons for use when adding and configuring the events Button Description Add new event Used for defining input events on the device selected in the Defined events list Depending on the type of device you may be able to define one or more input events on the device Some devices do not support input output at all Refer to the release notes for device specific information Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only If the device is capable of handling one input event only the button will open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only in which you define the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it If you have already defined an input event on a device capable of handling one input event only the Add new event button will not be available when the device is selected in the Defined events list However if you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select the defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events see Timer Events in the following Devices Capable of Handling Several Input Events If the device is capable of handling mo
238. is disabled no images audio will be transferred from the camera audio source to NetDVR Note If the Monitor application is installed and the camera in question including any attached microphones is included in the Monitor application configured in the Monitor Manager window the camera audio source cannot be disabled When this is the case remove the camera from the Monitor Manager window s layout before disabling the camera To disable a camera or audio source right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Disable When a camera or audio source is disabled it will be indicated as follows To enable a previously disabled camera or audio source simply right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Enable 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 13 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Tip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window Individual audio sources can also be disabled enabled in the Audio Device Settings Window Administrator Window s Buttons The Administrator window features the following buttons Button Description Monitor Manager or Service Manager Installation dependent feature The Monitor Manager button is available only when the recor
239. is selected and the first repair method fast repair fails Note In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected or the available drive space is suddenly reduced in another way an advanced database resizing procedure will automatically take place If archives are present on the same drive as the camera s database the oldest archive for all cameras archived on that drive will be deleted If no archives are present on the drive containing the camera s database the size of all camera databases on the drive will be reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest recordings thus temporarily limiting the size of all databases When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size Tip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS alert 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 30 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Motion Detection Settings The Motion Detection Settings section contains two buttons for configuring the camera s motion detection Button Description Motion Detection Opens the Adjust Motion Detection wind
240. is will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image in the Start Time fields 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 188 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 4 In the End Time fields specify end date and time for the export You may use the Set button as described above 5 Select the required source from the Source list You may select an individual camera in which case only images from the selected camera will be included in the export or Current View Sources in which case the export will include images from all cameras in the current view for which you have database export rights Tip To quickly select an individual camera you may also simply click the required camera slot in the view 6 Click the Database Export button This will open a separate export dialog Export dialog Date and time format may be different on your computer The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and source 7 If the surveillance system supports audio and the selected camera s have audio sources attached you are able to include audio in the export by selecting the Include Audio check box if no audio sources are attached the check box will not be available 8 If you want to compress the exported database select the Compress Exported Database check box Compression can reduce the size of the exported database by app
241. ition in the IPIX view and then save that position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button Printing Images With the Browse tab s Print section you are able to print recorded images To print an image do the following 1 Select the required camera from the Print section s Source list Alternatively you may select the camera in the view 2 Select the required date and time by using the controls in the Time Navigation section 3 Click the Print section s Print button This will open a separate window with a preview of the image to be printed as well as information about camera name image capture time print time and user name of the user printing the image You also have the option of including a user s note for example a description of the recording 4 Click the separate window s Print link to print the image and associated details Exporting Images With the Browse tab s Export section you are able to export recorded images in the AVI movie clip and JPEG still image formats See Exporting Video Evidence for detailed information about exporting recorded images With the NetGuard you are able to quickly generate and export video evidence in the AVI movie clip and JPEG still image formats Note Depending on your user rights access to generating AVI and or JPEG evidence from some cameras may be restricted Note Date and time formats used when browsing record
242. ivity very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 256 in the field next to the slider to control the noise sensitivity setting Tip If you find the concept of noise sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the High position The more you drag the slider towards the High position the more of the preview image becomes highlighted This is because with a high noise sensitivity even the slightest change in a pixel will be regarded as motion Motion Sensitivity The Motion Sensitivity slider determines how many pixels must change in the image before it is regarded as motion The selected motion sensitivity level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion level indication bar below the preview image The black vertical line serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 10 000 in the field next to the slider to control the motion sensitivity setting Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may requir
243. l feature on and off simply click the Carousel button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 124 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Sending Live Images to a NetMatrix Monitor Provided one or more NetMatrix Monitors have been installed and configured on your surveillance system you are able to send live images from the Monitor s camera layout for immediate display on particular NetMatrix Monitors See How to Send Live Images to NetMatrix Monitors for detailed information Monitor s Control Panel The Monitor s control panel section contains a number of buttons for controlling the Monitor s features Button Description Viewer Opens the Viewer with which you are able to browse and play back recordings print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats Note Use of the Viewer may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button HotSpot Available only when use of a hot spot in a separate floating window has been set up by the system administrator Opens the separate hot spot window Carousel Available only when use of the hot spot s carousel feature has been enabled by the system administrator Click to toggle the carousel feature on and off PTZ Menu Opens the PTZ menu with which you are able to control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Note The
244. lider With the PTZ Menu s zoom buttons you are able to control the zoom level of the PTZ camera Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click As an alternative to using the zoom buttons use the slider located below the two zoom buttons to control the zoom level Note that the slider can be used only with absolute positioning PTZ cameras only PTZ Menu s Preset Position Buttons If preset positions have been defined in the Administrator application you are able to move the PTZ camera to the stored preset positions by clicking the preset position buttons displayed in the lower part of the PTZ menu Preset position buttons are grouped into five preset banks A E with up to five preset position buttons 1 5 in each To use preset positions first click a preset bank button A E to display the preset position buttons in the required bank then click the required preset position button 1 5 to move the PTZ camera to the required preset position Tip You may use the A E and 1 5 keys on your keyboard to move the PTZ camera to preset positions Point and Click PTZ Control Point and click control is supported for absolute positioning PTZ cameras as well as some relative positioning PTZ cameras when a hot spot and the PTZ Menu are enabled 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 129 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Syst
245. ll now able to access the view in the shared group as from their next login Tip In addition to cameras you are able to add static images and HTML pages to views See Further Configuration Using Your Views on Different Computers Your user settings including your private views are stored on the NetDVR server This means that you are able to use your private views on any computer that has a NetGuard installed provided you log in to the NetGuard with your own user name and password Note From time to time your system administrator may make changes to camera or user properties on the NetDVR server When this is the case such changes will take effect in the NetGuard the first time you log in after the changes were made Such changes may occasionally require you to re create your views Ask your system administrator if in doubt In addition to creation of groups and views the NetGuard client s Setup tab lets you edit existing groups and views The Setup tab furthermore lets you adjust camera settings and set up joystick control for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab Your ability to edit groups and views also depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create groups and views you are also able to edit them 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 203 Remote Access On Net Su
246. llance system through a regular Microsoft Internet Explorer browser When accessing the surveillance system this way remote users will their access rights permitting be able to view live images from cameras on the surveillance system browse recorded images as well as generate and export AVI movie clips of recorded events Remote users should be aware that a more advanced and feature rich way of accessing the surveillance system may be available Ask your NetDVR system administrator if it is possible to connect with a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Logging in to the Surveillance System Note To log in to the surveillance system you must connect to a particular IP address and port number ask your NetDVR system administrator if in doubt about which IP address and port number to use Log in to the surveillance system the following way 1 Open a Microsoft Internet Explorer browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6 0 or later is required Tip To find out which Microsoft Internet Explorer version you are using select About Internet Explorer in your browser s Help menu 2 In the browser s Address field type http followed by the IP address or hostname of the NetDVR server you want to connect to You must specify the server s port number after the IP address Use a colon to separate the IP address and the port number Example If the IP address of the server is 123 123 123 123 and its port number is 81 type http 123 123 123 123 8
247. loating windows You are able to change the size of a floating window to suit your needs Any hotspots carousels NetMatrix positions still images or HTML pages included in the view will work as usual in a floating window To send a view to a Floating Window do the following 1 In the Live or Browse tab s Views section right click the required view This will bring up a menu 2 In the menu select Send View To gt Floating Window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 193 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Closing Separate Windows To close a separate view window regardless whether it is shown on the Primary Display as a floating window or on a secondary display simply click the Close button in the right corner of the window s blue top bar In order to allow the maximum possible viewing area the blue top bar of a view sent to Primary Display or a Secondary Display is hidden To show the top bar and get access to the Close button simply move your mouse pointer to the very top of the view Multiple Window Setup is Stored for Next Login If you have created a multiple window setup for your views the setup will be saved when you log out of the NetGuard EVS The next time you log in you will be asked if you want to use your previous views again including your multiple window setup Note however that this only applies if you lo
248. lock icon Note Views created in a NetGuard can only be shared with other NetGuard users Views created in a NetGuard EVS can only be shared with other NetGuard EVS users It is not possible to share views across the two types of client Edit Private Views Ability to create and edit views in private groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the NetGuard NetGuard EVS user who created them for more information about views see Creating Views NetGuard and How to Create and Manage Views NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right private groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Denying remote users the right to create their own views may make sense in some cases for example in order to limit bandwidth use Tip By clearing the View Live Browse and Setup check boxes you can effectively disable the user s ability to use the NetGuard NetGuard EVS for example while the user is on vacation This would typically be a temporary alternative to deleting the user 3 In the User Rights for Camera section s Defined Cameras list select each camera to which the user should have access via the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Tip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting cameras in the Defined Cameras list you are able to select several or all of the listed cameras in one go 4 Click the gt gt button to move the selected cameras
249. login in fact configuration may in some cases not be required at all To log in to the NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Double click the NetGuard EVS shortcut on your desktop If no NetGuard EVS desktop shortcut is available select the NetGuard EVS from Windows Start menu exactly how you do this is determined by where and how you have installed the NetGuard EVS on your computer 2 A splash screen is displayed while the NetGuard EVS loads this typically takes a few seconds only 3 The NetGuard EVS login window appears 4 Specify your login information in the following fields Server address Type the URL or IP address specified by your surveillance system administrator Internet connections may use different ports for different purposes therefore the URL or IP address may include a port number example http 123 123 123 123 80 where 80 indicates the port number If you have logged in before you may simply select the required server from the Server address list Authentication Lets you select between different methods of authentication i e the process of verifying that you are who you claim you are Note Not all surveillance systems support the use of all three authentication methods see Surveillance System Differences Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about which authentication method to use o Windows authentication current user with which you will be authenticated through your curre
250. lowing 5 In the Setup tab s Views section make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected 2 Click the Create New View button 3 Select the required layout for your new view Example only You are able to select layouts for displaying up to 64 8 8 cameras in a single view Tip Some of the selectable view layouts are marked Wide These view layouts are especially suitable for widescreen monitors 4 A new view is created under the group you selected The new view carries the default name New View plus an indication of the selected layout 5 Overwrite the default name with a view name of your choice You are now able to add cameras to the view Tip A group can contain an unlimited number of views You may also create any number of subgroups if required 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 164 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Tip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Views Note Your ability to edit views and groups depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view or group you are also able to edit it On the Setup tab you are able to assign shortcut numbers to views Shortcut numbers allow users to select views using the NetGuard EVS client s standard keyboard shortcuts To assig
251. manually through output buttons available in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS in the Monitor application and NetGuard The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Access You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 36 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requires that output has been defined in the I O Setup window You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the NetDVR system The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually through output buttons in the Monitor application or from a list in the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Output buttons will become available in the Monitor when the camera is
252. mera starts and the lights are switched on when an event button is clicked in the Monitor application a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event for an event button select the required event button in he Defined Events list then click the Add new event button When you click the Add new event button while an already specified event button is selected in the Defined Events list the New Timer window opens allowing you to specify the required timer event Tip You may specify several timer events under a single event button However you cannot use a timer event under another timer event Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events To edit an event button or a timer event specified under an event button select the required event button or timer event in the Defined Events list then click the Edit selected button If you have selected an event button clicking the Edit selected button will open the Edit Event window for editing event buttons If you have selected a timer event clicking the Edit selected button will open the New Timer window Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs As is the case with input events see External Input amp Output you are able to associate an event button with specific external outputs This way external output for example the sounding of a siren can be triggered automatically when an event
253. ministrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Input received from a wide variety of sources can be used to generate events in NetDVR Events can in turn be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVR such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions making images automatically appear on NetMatrix recipients etc Events can also be used for activating output Output units can be attached to output ports on many devices allowing you to activate lights sirens etc from NetDVR Such external output can be activated automatically by events or manually from the Monitor application and NetGuard NetGuard EVS Four Types of Events You specify which types of input should generate which types of events Basically four types of events exist On many devices you are able to attach external input units to input ports on the device Events based on input from such external input units typically sensors attached to doors windows etc are called input events Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc typically configured in the devices own software in which case you are also able to use such detections from the device as input events Input may also be received in the form of TCP or UDP data packages which can be a
254. mm dd yyyy hh mm ss gt In the following example we have created two shared groups in the NetGuard We have called them Shared Group1 and Shared Group2 Each group contains two views called View1 and View2 We have also created an HTML page with examples of all available button types including the ability to switch between our four different views The HTML for the page looks like this lt html gt lt body gt lt input type button value Change to Group1 View1 onclick top changeView Shared Group 1 View 1 gt lt br gt 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 217 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc lt input type button value Change to Group1 View2 onclick top changeView Shared Group 1 View 2 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Group2 View1 onclick top changeView Shared Group 2 View 1 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Group2 View2 onclick top changeView Shared Group 2 View 2 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Live onclick top selectPane live gt lt br gt lt input type button value Browse onclick top selectPane browse gt lt br gt lt input type button value Setup onclick top selectPane setup gt lt br gt lt input type button value Show pane onclick top showPane true gt lt br gt lt input type b
255. motion sequences that are shorter than the specified interval 7 In the Boundary Start and Boundary Stop sections specify the period of time to be covered by the search Note that the smart search is always carried out from the time of the image you are viewing and forwards or backwards The information you specify in the Boundary Start and Boundary Stop sections is only used to limit the search 8 Click the Next move forward in time or Previous move back in time buttons to search through images with motion detected in the selected areas within the specified period of time Each image in which motion has been found will be displayed in the camera layout The Smart Search control panel will show corresponding time information Smart Search control panel displaying search status information For each image found you have the following options in the Smart Search control panel Deselect Even while viewing images in which motion has been found you are able to adjust the area covered by smart search by dragging inside the image Normally the areas you select by dragging inside the image are included in the search However when you are looking through the smart search results you may want to be able to quickly exclude some areas When this is the case select the Deselect check box Now areas you select in the image will be excluded from the smart search Image Overlay Select check box to display the blue image overlay grid indicating
256. mputer running the NetDVR software and go to the following address http localhost 81 Note For remote users to view live images the Realtime Feed Server as well as the Monitor application must be running Web Server Administrator s Guide to Day to Day Operation Once it has been configured you are able to run the Web Server and remote users will be able to connect to it for image navigation and still image viewing Starting the Web Server The Web Server may already be running When the Web Server is running the Web Server icon appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon If the icon is not present you must start the Web Server To start the Web Server do the following 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Select All Programs 3 Select NetDVR gt Web Server The Web Server icon now appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon 4 Click the Web Server icon This will open the NetDVR Web Server window If Auto Start was selected when configuring the Web Server the Web Server will automatically start and remote users are able to connect to it If Auto Start was not selected when configuring the Web Server the Web Server must be started manually by clicking the Start server button 5 Web Server and user activity can be monitored in the NetDVR Web Server window s Log section 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern
257. n IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Monitor application is shut down or the Recording Server service is paused Database path Specify which local directory the database for the camera should be kept in Example C videodata To browse for a folder click the browse button next to the Database path field Note Even though it is possible to specify a path to a network drive it is highly recommended that you specify a path to a local drive If using a path to a network drive it will not be possible to save to the database should the network drive become unavailable Tip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available performance can be improved by distributing the databases of individual cameras across the local drives In case of database failure the following action should be taken Select which action to take if the database becomes corrupted The number of available actions depends on whether archiving has been enabled You enable archiving for a camera in the Archive setup window accessed from the Administrator window by clicking the Archive Setup button Repair Scan Delete if fails Default action If the database becomes corrupted two different repair methods will be attempted a fast repair and a thorough repair If both repair methods fail the contents of the database will be deleted Repair Delete if fails If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be a
258. n Note Camera images are only transferred to NetDVR while the Monitor application is running Hot Spot Window Lets you select the required hot spot functionality With the hot spot Monitor users are able to select a camera in the Monitor s camera layout grid and view enlarged images from the camera The hot spot may also be used for point and click operations on some PTZ cameras Select between three hot spot options None No hot spot default Hot Spot Select required size for the hot spot In separate window Hot spot is a separate floating window When a hot spot is enabled it will appear as a dark gray field in the camera layout grid unless you have selected the In separate window option Configuration A 3 3 grid with a 2 2 hot spot defined in the Administrator s Monitor Manager window Carousel Note Use of the carousel feature requires that a hot spot is enabled With the carousel feature you can make the hot spot automatically change between cameras in the Monitor s camera layout grid You specify the required interval between changes in the Seconds between shifts field 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 51 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc How to Specify which Cameras Should Display Images in the Monitor To specify which cameras should display images in the Monitor application
259. n do not use a name consisting of more than approximately 10 characters as the Monitor s event buttons are quite small View example Event buttons in the Monitor can only contain a limited amount of text In this example the button is not large enough to contain a very long name Bear this in mind when naming event buttons Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the Event buttons window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 100 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 4 In the Event Buttons window your newly defined event button is now listed you may have to click th
260. n Net Surveillance Systems Inc Select check box to use a higher frame rate when motion is detected Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Desired speedup framerate fields The camera will return to the original frame rate two seconds after the last motion is detected On event Note Use of speedup on event requires that events have been defined in the I O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select check box to use a higher frame rate when an external event occurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists The camera will increase its frame rate when the start event occurs and return to the original frame rate when the stop event occurs Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Desired speedup framerate fields Desired speedup framerate Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Specify required number of frames to be used when motion is detected and or an external event occurs in first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified in the Desired framerate field Example 16 frames per second Tip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the rig
261. n a shortcut number to a view do the following Note Illustrations used in the following are examples only top level folders may have different names in your version 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view 2 Specify the required shortcut number in the Shortcut field and press ENTER on your keyboard 3 The specified shortcut number will now appear in brackets in front of the view s name This will also be the case on the Live and Browse tabs allowing users to quickly find a view s shortcut number 4 Repeat as necessary for other views Renaming Views or Groups Note Your ability to edit views and groups depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view or group you are also able to edit it To rename a view or group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view or group in the Views section 2 Click the Rename button 3 Overwrite the existing group name with a new name of your choice Deleting Views or Groups IMPORTANT Deleting a group will delete all views and any subgroups within the group as well Note Your ability to edit and delete views and groups depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view or group you are also able to edit and delete it To delete a view or group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view or group in the Views section 2 Click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm t
262. n image map area for each zone This way users will be able to simply click a zone in order to go to the view displaying cameras from that zone For instance the red zone on our image map mirrors the Go to Shared Group2 View2 button from the previous example When clicking inside the red zone users will go to View2 in Group2 Importing the HTML Page Importing a navigation HTML page into a view is in principle no different from importing any other type of HTML page into a view in the NetGuard EVS The two important things to remember are The HTML page should be stored locally on the user s PC You should make sure HTML scripting is enabled on the HTML page when importing it To import the HTML page do the following 1 Go to the NetGuard EVS client s Setup tab 2 From the Setup tab s System Overview section drag the HTML Page link to the required position in the required view 3 This will open the Open URL dialog in which you specify the required HTML page 4 Having imported the HTML page select its position in the view and go to the Setup tab s Properties section 5 In the Properties section select Enable HTML Scripting Selecting Enable HTML Scripting ensures that the scripting required for your buttons or other navigation features to work is automatically inserted in the HTML page 6 Depending on the navigation features you have included on your HTML page you may often want to import the HTML page into several views in
263. n the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS However only the first 25 preset positions can be used in the Monitor application You define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section Relative For a relative positioning PTZ camera the number of preset positions will depend on the camera video server and PTZ driver used For some relative positioning PTZ cameras you will only be able to use preset positions defined on the camera video server itself when this is the case the preset positions are typically defined through the camera video server s built in web page For relative positioning PTZ cameras allowing definition of preset positions through the NetDVR system you define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section How to Define a Preset Position To define a preset position do the following Note Some PTZ cameras of the relative positioning kind do not allow you to define preset positions as described in the following for such cameras you should define preset positions on the camera video server itself 1 First use the controls in the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s PTZ View section to move the PTZ camera to the required position 2 Having mov
264. n you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons your are returned to the Event Buttons window in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Camera Specific Event Buttons To specify an event button for a specific camera select the required camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons your are returned to the Events window for specifying event buttons in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Timer Events When you have specified an event button you are able to associate timer events with the event button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 82 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Timer events are separate events occurring a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event button has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts when an event button is clicked in the Monitor application a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds A ca
265. n you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list Note An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way but only the top eight outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no limitations to the number of available outputs 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 96 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc You are able to determine each output s position among the Monitor s output buttons or the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS client output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select output
266. nables the use of IPIX a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images Note Use of the IPIX technology requires either a dedicated IPIX camera or a regular camera equipped with a special IPIX camera lens for which a special IPIX license key is required If the device in question is for a dedicated IPIX camera the check box is selected by default and you do not have to enter an IPIX license key in the neighboring field iPIX License Key License key for using the IPIX technology obtained when registering the software Note This information is only required if the Enable iPIX check box is selected manually 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 20 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Network Settings for Video Device Section The Network Settings for Video Device section contains the following fields Field Description IP address or DNS Host Name IP address or DNS host name of the device in question Note If Use DNS host name check box is selected the name of the IP address field changes to DNS Host Name in order to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address Use DNS host name By selecting the check box you are able to use a DNS host name for identifying the device instead of using the device s IP address When check box is selected the IP address field changes its name to DNS Host Nam
267. nalyzed and if matching specified criteria used to generate events Such events are called generic events Events may be based on NetDVR detecting motion on a camera Such events are called VMD i e Video Motion Detection events Finally events may be generated manually by users clicking custom made buttons in NetDVR Such buttons are called event buttons 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 68 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Specifying Input Events and Output In NetDVR your main entry point for configuration of input event and output handling is the Administrator window By clicking the Administrator window s I O Setup button you open the I O Setup window in which you are able to specify each individual input event VMD event and output By clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button you open the Event Buttons window in which you are able to specify event buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity By clicking the Administrator window s Generic Events button you open the Generic Events window in which you are able to specify generic events By clicking the Administrator window s I O Control button you open the I O Control window in which you are able to associate specific events with specific output This way you can for example specify that when m
268. nc Event Rule String Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields and buttons in the Event rule string section Field Button Description Event substring Lets you specify the individual items for which NetDVR should look out when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples Single term User001 when added to the Event message include field the term will appear as User001 Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message include field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as e g User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence in order to match your criterion If the terms must appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one i e so they will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field Event message include Displays the string which will be used for the actual package analysis The field is not directly editable However you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determin
269. nd playback feeds Remote users connect to the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server through a regular browser no client software is required Both servers can be started from Windows Start menu if they have not been added to the startup folder when NetDVR was installed By default the Web Server uses port 81 and the Realtime Feed Server uses port 9513 Note Both servers must be started before they are active and remote users are able to connect to them If remote users should be able to view live images the Monitor application must be running as well 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 220 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Web Server Configuration To configure the Web Server open the Web Server s Settings window the following way 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Click All Programs 3 Select NetDVR gt Web Server The Web Server icon now appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon 4 Click the Web Server icon This will open the NetDVR Web Server window 5 In the NetDVR Web Server window click the Settings button This will open the Settings window in which you configure the Web Server Settings window The Settings window lets you configure the Web Server The Settings window is divided into two sections the Web Server setup section and the User adm
270. nection to the camera has been lost and that another connection attempt is currently being made Connection to engine failed Retrying Indicates that a connection to the surveillance system server could not be established and that another connection attempt is currently being made This message may occur if connection to the surveillance system is temporarily lost If your surveillance system consists of several interconnected servers the message may also occur if the server from which you are requesting the camera s recordings is temporarily unavailable If the problem persists consult your surveillance system administrator No images available for Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Database might be empty Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that it is not possible to show images from the camera the very likely reason being that there are no recordings in the camera s database Bear in mind that the settings determining when recordings from the camera are stored in the database are determined by the surveillance system administrator Sometimes the surveillance system administrator may specify that recordings should only be stored within particular time periods or when particular events occur This may explain why you are perhaps able to view live images from the camera on the NetGuard EVS client s Live tab while at the same time you may find that no recordings have been stored for viewing on the NetGuard E
271. ng Camera Settings In the Setup tab s Camera Control section you are able to adjust camera settings To adjust camera settings select the position of the required camera in the view The position you select will be indicated by a bold border 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 205 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Image Quality The Image Quality setting determines the quality of the images when viewed but also affects bandwidth usage If the NetGuard is used over the internet over a slow network connection or if for other reasons you need to limit the bandwidth used by the NetGuard image quality can be reduced on the server side by selecting e g Low or Medium Tip You can quickly reduce the bandwidth usage for all cameras in the view by reducing the image quality for a single camera then clicking the Apply To All button Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the selected camera Default is Unlimited IPIX Split Mode Available only if the selected camera is an IPIX camera IPIX is a technology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images The NetGuard supports up to four different viewpoints from a single IPIX camera The IPIX Split Mode list lets you select the required spilt mode One by One lets you view a single viewpoint Two by Two lets you view four different viewpoints at a time When vie
272. ng both interim and major releases changes service packs and any patches for the product Having a valid SUP may easily lead to measurable savings for your organization The standard cost of a product upgrade for example from version X 1 to X 2 is normally 35 of the full product s recommended retail price for a single upgrade depending on the product the whole SUP cost per year is much lower then the above single software upgrade and you will be entitle to receive as many upgraded released in the covered period Legal Notice The following product manual is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty OnSSI reserves the right to make adjustments without prior notification C 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI NetDVMS NetEVS NetDVR ProSight NetGuard NetGuard EVS NetSwitcher NetMatrix NetTransact NetCentral NetPDA and NetCell are trademark of OnSSI Other names are the property of their respective owners 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 6 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc System Requirements The following are minimum system requirements for running NetDVR and associated applications Surveillance Sys
273. ng event is selected in the list clicking the Add new event button will open the New Timer window in which you are able to specify timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred Edit selected Opens the Edit Event window for editing generic events in which you are able to edit the settings for an existing event selected in the Defined events list Remove selected Lets you remove an existing event selected in the Defined events list Note The selected event will be removed without further warning Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for specifying generic events lets you specify the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to specify the criteria according to which NetDVR should analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs Tip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters such as etc within the text string to be analyzed The Add New Event window for specifying generic events 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 36
274. ng the transfer of 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 127 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc images from cameras to NetDVR You will be asked to confirm that you want to close down the application Note Use with caution Exiting the Monitor will stop recordings Certain user rights may be required in order to be able to close down the Monitor See the description of the Admin Login button Monitoring Audio If the camera selected in the Monitor s camera layout is recording audio you are able to listen to live audio through speakers attached to the computer running NetDVR If using a multi port video server device audio will always be attached to the first video input on the device To mute live audio click the Mute Audio button in the Monitor s control panel Recording is not affected by muting audio in the Monitor Running Out of Disk Space Alert In order to warn you of an impending possibility of losing data the Monitor will prominently display the message Running out of disk space if available disk space on the NetDVR server goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera Example For a system with ten cameras the alert will show if the available disk space goes below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras Consult your surveillance system administrator if you see this message Monitor How to The Moni
275. ngs window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit Event window for editing input events lets you edit the settings for an existing input event on devices capable of handling one input event only 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 75 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The Edit Event window for editing input events Access You access the Edit Event window for editing input events by selecting the required device and clicking the Edit selected button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Edit selected button is clicked Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing input events contains the following fields Field Description External sensor connected to Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is defined Sensor connected through Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input event should be connected to Event occurs when input goes Lets you select whether the input event sh
276. ns at a Glance Regular Browser Access through Web Server RealtimeFeed Server NetGuard Access through ImageServer NetGuard EVS Access through ImageServer Remote User s Installation None remote user access system through regular browser Optional client can be installed on remote user s computer or accessed from server Client must be installed on remote user s computer Net Framework 2 0 is required on computers running the NetGuard EVS Remote User s Feature Set Limited Feature rich Very feature rich Includes features otherwise only available in Monitor application Remote User s Ease of Use Easy to use Very easy to use Setup of camera views can be handled locally as well as centrally With central views handling remote users can begin using their NetGuard instantly upon first login Very easy to use Setup of camera views can be handled locally as well as centrally With central views handling remote users can begin using their NetGuard EVS instantly upon first login System Administrator s Installation None the Web Server and RealtimeFeed Server are integrated in NetDVR None the ImageServer runs as a service on the NetDVR server None the ImageServer runs as a service on the NetDVR server System Administrator s Feature Set Limited configuration primarily through Web Server Very flexible configuration through ImageServer Administrator includes handling of lo
277. ns than the Default Archiving Directory You are of course also able to store archives at other locations than locally in the default archiving directory You may for example specify that your archives should be stored on a network drive When archiving to other locations than the default archiving directory NetDVR will first store the archive in the local default archiving directory then immediately move the archive to the archiving location you have specified While this may at first glance seem unnecessary it greatly speeds up the archiving procedure which is important because all cameras are stopped during archiving Archiving directly to a network drive would mean that archiving time would vary depending on the available bandwidth on the network First storing the archive locally then moving it ensures that the archiving is always performed as fast as possible If archiving to a network drive note the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the NetDVR system Archiving Audio If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video server with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 When an audio source is enabled audio is recorded to the associated camera s database This will affect the database s capacity for storing video It is thus important to bear in mind that the maximum limit of
278. nsistency found in log file name at beginning of log file The log file header is not correct This situation is most likely to occur if a user has attempted to delete the beginning of a log file 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 233
279. nt Windows login and do not have to specify any user name or password This is the NetGuard EVS client s default authentication method i e the method which is automatically used unless you select another method o Windows authentication with which you will be authenticated through your Windows login but you will need to type your Windows user name and password o Basic authentication which can only be used when connection to selected surveillance systems User name Only required if the authentication method Windows authentication or Basic authentication is selected If using Windows authentication type your Windows user name The user name is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing for example amanda and Amanda 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 158 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Password Only required if the authentication method Windows authentication or Basic authentication is selected If using Windows authentication type your Windows password Remember password When using Windows authentication or Basic authentication you have the option of selecting Remember password in which case you can simply click Connect the next time you want to log in Note Depending on your type of organization and work environment security restrictions may apply Consult your surveillance system administrator
280. nutes to pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera even if motion is detected or events occur in between If specifying 0 e mail alerts will be sent each time motion is detected or events occur potentially resulting in a very large number of e mail alerts being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 66 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Testing Your E Mail Alert Configuration You are able to test your e mail alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test e mail to the specified recipients If Include Image is selected the test e mail will have a test JPG image attached Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note Use of the SMS mobile phone text message alert feature requires that an external Siemens TC 35 GSM modem has been attached to a serial port on the computer running the NetDVR software The SMS settings window lets you enable and configure the use of SMS alerts Such SMS alerts can automatically be sent to one or mo
281. of course combine the NetPDA NetCell solution with other remote access solutions such as the NetGuard EVS No Determine your needs based on the questions and answers provided in the following Has your surveillance system s recording server been installed as a service rather than as the Monitor application Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer The NetGuard EVS offers functionality otherwise only available through the Monitor application No Determine your needs based on the questions and answers provided in the following Will remote users access the surveillance system over very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections Yes Use regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server No Use NetGuard or NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer Is it acceptable to install client software on remote users computers Yes Use NetGuard or NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer as remote users can run the NetGuard straight from the NetDVR server as an alternative to the client being installed on remote users computers Remote access can also be provided through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server as this does not require any client software but this is only recommended for remote access through very slow connections Will you require a large amount of future flexibility from your remote access solution Yes Use NetGuard
282. ol Scheme To remove an existing patrol scheme select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list and click the Remove button Note The selected patrol scheme will be removed from the list without further warning Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for a PTZ Patrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify which of the PTZ camera s preset positions should be used for the selected patrolling scheme 1 In the Preset Positions list select the names of the preset positions you want to use A preset position can be used more than once in a patrol scheme for example if the preset position covers an especially important location Tip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting from the Preset Positions list you are able to select several or all of list s preset positions in one go 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected preset positions to the Patrolling list 3 The camera will move between preset positions in the sequence they appear in the Patrolling list starting at the preset position listed first If you want to change the sequence of preset positions in the Preset Positions list select a preset position name and use the move up or move down buttons to move the selected preset position name To remove a preset position from the Patrolling list select the preset position in question and click the lt lt button Specifying Timing
283. omatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur To configure the use of preset positions on events click the Setup button This will open the Event window for preset positions on event in which you are able to associate particular preset positions with particular events To use preset positions on event select the Goto preset on event check box Patrolling Section To configure PTZ patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions click the Setup button to go to the Setup PTZ Patrolling window PTZ patrolling requires that at least two preset positions have been defined Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Event window for preset positions on events lets you associate particular preset positions with particular events timer events or event buttons You are thus able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs The Event window for preset positions on events Access To access the Event window for preset positions on events click the Setup button in Preset Position on Events section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window Note To use preset positions on events you must have specified input or VMD events event butt
284. on see Using Background Cameras If Allow cameras to run in the background is not selected cameras must be included in the in the Monitor application in order to be accessible you include cameras in the Monitor application through the Monitor Manager window Start cameras on remote live requests Cameras may be stopped either manually in the Monitor application or because they have reached the end of an online schedule in which case NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will not be able to view live images from the cameras However if Start cameras on remote live requests is selected NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to start the camera in the Monitor in order to view live images from the cameras Create default schedule for new cameras If selected default a schedule specifying that the camera is always online i e transferring images to NetDVR will automatically be created in the Camera Alert Scheduler window The automatically created schedule can be edited manually at any time If not selected no schedule will automatically be created meaning that the camera will not automatically be transferring images to NetDVR When required schedules can be added manually in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Email Settings Clicking the Email Settings button opens the E Mail setup window in which you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Sms Settings Clicking the Sms Settings button opens the SMS settings
285. on detection settings for the camera in question See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information Archiving Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights With the daily archiving feature in NetDVR you are able to keep recordings for as long as required You enable and configure archiving in the Archive setup window The Archive setup window also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera Benefits of Archiving By default information received from cameras is stored by NetDVR in a database for each camera The database for each camera see Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB per day before the oldest records in the database are overwritten With daily archiving the amount of records you are able to store is limited only by the available hardware storage capacity Note however that it is only possible to archive up to 40 GB per camera per day By using archiving you will also be able to back up archived records on backup media of your choice using your preferred backup software How Archiving Works For each camera for which archiving has been specified the contents of the camera database will be moved to a default archiving directory called Archives This will happen automatically once every day at a time specif
286. onality to scs scripts In the following example we have added a line so the scs script from the previous example will log in to http ourserver with the current Windows user then minimize the NetGuard EVS application lt ScriptEngine gt lt Login gt lt ServerAddress gt http ourserver lt ServerAddress gt lt AuthenticationType gt WindowsDefault lt AuthenticationType gt lt Login gt lt Script gt SCS Application Minimize lt Script gt lt ScriptEngine gt Format Valid parameter formats are param value Examples UserName Tommy UserName Tommy 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 185 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc UserName Tommy Username Tommy Password Tommy Day to Day Use With the NetGuard EVS you are able to quickly export video evidence in the AVI movie clip JPEG still image and the surveillance system database formats Note Depending on your user rights access to exporting AVI JPEG and database evidence from some or all cameras may be restricted Exporting in AVI and JPEG Formats To export video evidence in the AVI or JPEG formats do the following Note Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings 1 Select the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab 2 In the Browse tab s Export section specify when t
287. ons or generic events Only one PTZ preset position can be defined per event per camera Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events When associating a preset position from a particular PTZ camera with one or more events you are able to select between all events defined on the NetDVR system you are not limited to selecting events defined on a particular device To associate a particular preset position with a particular event do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Available Preset Positions list in the left side of the Event window 2 Select the required event in the list of available events the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located to the right of the Available Events list This will copy the selected event to the window s rightmost list in which events associated with the selected preset position are listed When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the PTZ camera will automatically move to the required preset position 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 43 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc You are able to associate a preset position with more than one event Simply repeat the process for each required association To end the association between a particular preset position and a particular event simply select the requi
288. order for the navigation to fully work System Administrator s Check List Surveillance system administrators wishing to create and distribute navigation HTML pages to NetGuard EVS users do the following 1 Create the required HTML page The navigation controls in the HTML page must match the views users see in their NetGuard EVS For example in order for a button leading to View1 to work a view called View1 must exist in users NetGuard EVS If you intend to distribute the HTML page to a group of users the views in which the HTML page will be used should be placed in shared groups 2 Save the HTML page locally on each computer on which it will be used When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations 3 Import the HTML page into the NetGuard EVS views in which it will be used 4 Test that the navigation controls on the imported HTML page work as intended 5 Enjoy simple and intuitive NetGuard EVS navigation tailored to meet your organization s needs For advanced users it is possible to create function calls in the NetGuard EVS Note that the use of scripting will require some familiarity with programming 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 1
289. ormats Print Opens the Print control panel from which you are able to print images from the camera selected in the camera layout Smart Search Opens the Smart Search control panel in which you are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of the view from a particular camera Send E mail Report Opens the Send E mail Report control panel from which you are able to send evidence via e mail Help Lets you view the built in help Alternatively press your keyboard s F1 button to open the help system 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 131 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Setting Up the Viewer s Camera Layout The camera layout is the area of the Viewer in which you view images The camera layout section may display images from up to 16 different cameras at a time You can configure the camera layout to suit your exact needs First specify the camera layout s grid size i e how many camera slots you want the camera layout to contain then specify which camera to use in each camera slot Selecting Grid Size To specify how many camera slots you want in the camera layout do the following 1 Click the Settings icon in the Viewer s toolbar Settings icon This will open the Settings control panel 2 In the Settings control panel s Layout list select the required camera layout grid 1 1 2 2 3 3 or
290. ot for viewing selected camera images in high quality static images such as gif jpeg etc HTML pages or NetMatrix triggered video Adding Individual Cameras To add a camera to a view do the following 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of the NetGuard EVS window 2 In the Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to Cameras then the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 3 Select the required camera from the list and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view an image from the camera will provided a connection can be established appear in the selected position If a connection cannot be established for example if the surveillance system s recording server is not running the name of the camera will be displayed in the selected position When the camera position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section see Adjusting Camera Properties for detailed information 4 Repeat for each camera required in the view Tip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server link to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view from the selected position onwards Make sure a suff
291. otion is detected on a camera typically specified as a VMD event a siren should automatically sound output If you want users to be able to manually activate output when operating specific cameras you specify this in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the NetDVR release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video server devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to NetDVR see How to Add a Device For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note When such I O devices are added input on the I O devices can be used to generate events in NetDVR and events in NetDVR can be used for activating output on the I O devices This means that I O devices can be used in your events based system setup in the same way as a camera Note When using some I O devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The interval between state checks called a
292. otion sequences or events are clickable allowing you to quickly jump to the time at which motion was detected or an event occurred To use the alarm overview click the Alarm Overview icon in the toolbar to open the Alarm Overview control panel in which the list is displayed Alarm Overview icon By default the list shows motion sequences from the most recent database for the selected camera If you want to view a list of sequences from archived databases as well click the Alarm Overview control panel s Get All button Alarm Overview control panel In addition to listing motion sequences the Alarm Overview control panel can also display a list of occurred events the camera s event log To toggle between viewing a list of motion sequences and a list of occurred events click the Alarm Overview control panel s Sequences and Events buttons What to Do To view recordings from the time at which motion was detected or an event occurred select the required sequence event in the list When you select a sequence event in the list the camera layout will display images matching the exact time of the motion detection or event To view what took place prior to and after the motion detection or event use the timeline browser or playback controls to browse recordings from around the time of the motion detection or event Browsing Recordings with Smart Search Smart search lets you search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from a parti
293. ould be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises or falls Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question External event name Lets you edit the name of the input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if this event occurs Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 76 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Note Access to features
294. overwrite the existing camera name with a new one Camera Number Users of the NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Cam Number field A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 123456789 It is highly recommended that you use a unique camera shortcut number for each camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or the NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Tip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in the NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts Audio Source Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Audio Device Settings window lets you change basic settings for an audio source Access You access the Audio Device Settings window from the Administrator window Selecting an audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Settings button Field Check Box Description Device name Display
295. ow You may define as many local IP address ranges as required If required an IP address range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 3 When ready click the Define local IP ranges window s Close button to return to the ImageServer Administrator window Tip There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window However you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window s list delete it by clicking the Delete button and then simply add a new range reflecting your requirements The Image Server s User administration window lets you define NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users Access You access the User administration window by clicking the User Setup button in the ImageServer Administrator window You are able to add new users in two ways which may be combined Note however that only one of the ways will work for NetGuard users 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 151 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Basic user Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for each individual user This method works for NetGuard as well as NetGuard EVS users If the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed this method also works for NetPDA NetCell Client users Windows user
296. ow in which you are able to specify motion detection sensitivity levels Motion Color Opens the Color window in which you are able to select a color to be used for highlighting detected motion when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Note Highlighting of detected motion in the Monitor application requires that the Show Motion check box in the Camera Monitor Setup section is selected Exclude Regions Settings The Exclude Regions Settings section contains two buttons for specifying areas in the camera s images in which motion detection should not be used Button Description Exclude Regions Opens the Define Exclusion Regions window in which you are able to disable motion detection in specific areas of the camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Region Color Opens the Select Color window in which you are able to select between three colors to be used for highlighting areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Note Highlighting of areas with disabled motion detection in the Monitor application requires that the Show Regions check box in the Camera Monitor Setup section is selected Image Quality The Image Quality button opens the
297. owever you are able to customize the setup for all joysticks attached to the computer running the NetGuard EVS To customize joystick setup do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS client s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Joystick Setup The Joystick Setup window appears 3 In the Joystick Setup window select the required joystick in the Selected Joystick list The axes and buttons available on the selected joystick will be listed in the Axis Setup and Button Setup sections respectively Joystick Setup window displaying available axes and buttons on a selected joystick 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 176 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 4 In the Axis Setup section specify settings for the available axes With a joystick you are typically able to navigate camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis typically refers to the depth zoom level Example X Y and Z axes Invert By default a PTZ camera will move to the right when you move the joystick to the right along the X axis move up when you move the joystick towards you along the Y axis etc By selecting Invert you are able to change this to the opposite You are thus able to freely determine whether the camera should for exampl
298. owing sequence First image Moves to the first image in the database for the selected camera Last image Moves to the last image in the database for the selected camera Time Sliders The Time Navigation section s time sliders let you browse recordings simply by dragging the sliders handles Drag to the left to move backwards in time drag to the right to move forward in time Use the upper times slider for fine browsing within a limited period of time use the lower slider for more coarse browsing within longer time spans Playback Slider and Buttons The Time Navigation section s playback slider lets you specify the required playback speed In the slider s middle position playback speed is real time 1 00x Drag the slider to the left for a slower playback speed drag to the right for a faster playback speed An indication of the exact playback speed is displayed in the upper right corner of the Time Navigation section s Master Time area Use the playback buttons to play back recordings Play reverse Plays back recordings backwards in time 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 211 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Play forward Plays back recordings forward in time Stop Stops playback Tip Dragging the playback slider to its leftmost position pauses playback Go To Time The Time Navigation section s Go To Time fields let you qu
299. p playback When playback is started all cameras in the camera layout will play back recordings Use to control the playback speed When the slider is in its middle position playback is real time regardless of the recorded frame rates Browsing Recordings with the Motion View Motion view lets you view a graph displaying sequences of recordings from the selected camera The motion levels indicated in the graph can be used as an indication of what has been recorded The graph is draggable allowing you to browse the sequences Motion view graph To use motion view click the Motion View icon in the toolbar to open the Motion View control panel in which the draggable graph is displayed Motion View icon A change in the color of the graph indicates the start of a new motion sequence The black vertical line at the center of the graph indicates the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout What to Do To browse recordings using motion view click inside the graph area and move your mouse sideways to browse recordings Images are updated when you release the mouse button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 135 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Browsing Recordings with the Alarm Overview Alarm overview lets you view a list of sequences with detected motion for a selected camera Listed m
300. p when specific events defined by the surveillance system administrator occur Click anywhere inside the image to reset the event indicator This indicator may appear black if event indication has not been specified for the camera in question of if no specified events have occurred Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Motion indicator the indicator in the middle solid red Lights up when motion is detected in the image Click anywhere inside the image to reset the motion indicator Online indicator the rightmost of the three indicators blinking green Changes state every time an image is received from the camera Enlarging Images from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the blue image bar above the image 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 208 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Double clicking blue bar above image enlarges view To return to normal view simply double click the blue image bar again Tip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when viewed enlarged Output Control If the selected camera has external outputs defined for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren such outputs can be triggered from the NetGuard
301. plication s Viewer However background cameras can be accessed for viewing of live and recorded images through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Apart from the fact that background cameras cannot be immediately accessed through the Monitor other settings such as scheduling input events output archiving the ability for cameras to be started on remote live requests see description of the General Settings window s Advanced section etc fully apply for background cameras Tip If you require Monitor access to a camera which has been running in the background you can simply include the camera in the Monitor provided not all of the Monitor s 64 positions are already in use You do this in the Monitor Manager window The use of background cameras may be relevant in a number of scenarios entirely depending on your needs One Possible Scenario Avoiding Using Resources on Displaying Cameras Images in Monitor Some organizations use background cameras simply to avoid using resources on displaying images from some or all cameras in the Monitor application Another Possible Scenario Hiding Cameras Images from Prying Eyes In some organizations the computer running the Monitor application may be situated in busy control rooms or reception areas where lots of people walk in and out Such organizations may use background cameras to avoid displaying images from some or all cameras in the Monitor application Wh
302. polling frequency is specified in the Advanced window For such I O devices the polling frequency should be set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which I O devices require polling see the release note I O Setup Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The I O Setup window lets you define input events VMD Video Motion Detection events and output for devices on your surveillance system When events occur they can trigger one or more actions Input events occur when input from an external input unit is received on a device s input port for example when an external sensor detects that a door is opened Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address in which case such detections from the device can also be used as input events VMD events occur when NetDVR detects motion on a particular camera Outputs are used for activating external output units for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren The I O Setup window is used for defining which input events VMD events and outputs should be available on your system 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 36
303. put event only contains the following fields Field Check Box Description External sensor connected to Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is defined Sensor connected through Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input event is connected to Event occurs when input goes Lets you select whether input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises or falls Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question External event name Lets you specify a name for the input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if this e
304. r PC Path If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 12 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 13 By default the AVI file will get a file name based on the export start time in the 24 hour format along the structure yyyymmdd hhmmss avi year month day hour minute second example 20050927 130603 for a file with a start time of 13 06 03 on 27th September 2005 The name will automatically appear in the AVI FileName field The default file name format is independent of regional settings on your computer You are always able to change the default file name to a name of your choice simply by overwriting the default file name 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 187 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 13 Click the Export button to begin the export The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export Export status bar Tip If you are e
305. r has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 54 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Check the Sound box when you want to set or clear periods with sound alerts for the selected camera in the Monitor application Note The Sound box is solely used when setting or clearing periods with sound alerts It cannot be used for scheduling audio recordings as audio recordings are not scheduled separately If a device on your system supports audio recording audio is automatically recorded on the device s camera channel one when the camera is online Patrolling Check the Patrolling box when you want to set or clear periods with patrolling for a selected PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera Note The Patrolling box is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up Start event When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the NetDVR software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the
306. r icons may be available to you Settings Opens the Viewer s Settings control panel in which you are able to specify settings for the camera layout and specify the time span for use in the timeline Single View Switches to a single enlarged view of images from the camera selected in the camera layout Tip You may also simply double click a camera in the camera layout to switch between single view and multi view Multi View Switches to multi view displaying all cameras in the selected camera layout view Tip You may also simply double click a camera in the camera layout to switch between single view and multi view Database Information Opens the Database Information control panel in which you select the cameras you want displayed in the camera layout Motion View Opens the Motion View control panel in which you are able to view a graph displaying sequences with motion The graph is draggable allowing you to browse the sequences Alarm Overview Opens the Alarm Overview control panel in which you are able to view a list of generated motion and event alarms By clicking alarms in the list you are able to browse recordings from around the time at which the alarms were generated Image Controls Opens the Image Controls control panel in which you have access to digital zoom and interlacing settings Export Opens the Export control panel with which you are able to export entire video and audio sequences in different f
307. r in question is of the type Basic user To edit the user name or password for an existing Basic user do the following 1 Select the required user in the Current users list and click the Change password button 2 Edit the user name and or password as required then click OK Remember to inform the user about the change How to Remove an Existing User To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click the Delete button When removed from the list the user will no longer be able to log in Note Using this method to delete an imported Windows user will only remove the user s right to log in with the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS or if applicable NetPDA NetCell Client it will not remove the user s data defined locally on the server What Information to Provide to Users The information you need to provide in order to enable users to effortlessly log in to the surveillance system depends on whether the users are using NetGuard or NetGuard EVS For NetPDA NetCell Client users see Using the NetPDA NetCell Client NetGuard Users When users log in with NetGuard they will always use basic authentication Provide them with the following information User name Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case Password Users should enter their passwords exactly as you have spe
308. r should recognize as coming from a local network in which case it will respond with a suitable IP address and seamless communication will be possible Max number of clients The maximum number of NetGuard and NetGuard EVS allowed to connect at the same time is five You are able to further limit the number of NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users allowed to connect at the same time Depending on your NetDVR configuration and the performance of the hardware and network used limiting the number of simultaneously connected clients may help reduce server load If more than the allowed number of simultaneously connected NetGuard NetGuard EVS attempt to log in only the allowed number of NetGuard NetGuard EVS will be allowed access Any NetGuards NetGuard EVS in excess of the allowed number will receive an error message when attempting to log in To specify a different maximum number of NetGuards NetGuard EVS allowed to connect at the same time overwrite the value in the Max number of clients field with the required value Note A four minute session timeout period applies for client sessions on the Image Server In many cases NetGuard or NetGuard EVS users may not notice this at all However the session timeout period will be very evident in some cases for example if you set the Max Number of client s value to 1 When this is the case and the single allowed NetGuard or NetGuard EVS user logs out four minutes must pass before it will be possible to
309. r the few sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection Clear All Lets you quickly clear all grid sections in the preview image Auto By clicking the Auto button you can make NetDVR automatically detect areas with noise insignificant changes in individual pixels which should not be regarded as motion in the image and automatically mark such areas as areas in which motion detection should be disabled As the automatic detection is based on an analysis of a number of images it may take a few seconds from you click the Auto button to noisy areas are detected and marked as areas in which motion detection should be disabled Note The automatic detection of noisy areas happens according to the noise sensitivity setting specified in the Adjust Motion Detection window In order for the automatic detection of noisy areas to work as intended it is recommended that you specify a noise 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 35 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc sensitivity setting that matches your requirements before you make use of the automatic detection feature Show Grid With the Show grid check box selected default the preview image contains a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections With the Show grid check box cleared the grid in the preview image is removed This may provide
310. r you may create a new private group for the view Note Views are created on the NetGuard client s Setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 200 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Creating a Private Group To create a private group do the following on the Setup tab 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the Private folder or if you have created private groups before any folder labeled Private 2 In the Setup tab s Group Control section type a name for the group in the Group Name field then click the New button Your new group will now appear in the Setup tab s Views section with the name you have specified and labeled as Private You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View in a Private Group To create a view in a private group make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected in the Setup tab sViews section and do the following 3 In the Setup tab s View Control section type a name for the view in the View Name field 2 Click one of the View Control section s seven available New View layouts Your new view is automatically added to the selected group Tip A group whether private or shared can contain an unlimited number of views More than one private and shared group can exist Adding C
311. rchive this way you can use all of the Viewer s image browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 142 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Remote Access Remote users can access a NetDVR surveillance system in different ways With a NetGuard can be installed locally or run from server good selection of standard features Example of NetGuard user interface With a NetGuard EVS installed locally very feature rich based on the Net platform and thus highly flexible for future integration of plugins etc Example of NetGuard EVS user interface With a regular Microsoft Internet Explorer browser using NetDVR s built in Web and Realtime Feed Servers offer a very limited feature set recommended only for remote users on very slow connections Whether this remote access method works on you surveillance system depends on how your surveillance system was installed see Administration of Web Server and Realtime Feed Server for more information Example of user interface pro vided through regular browser With a NetPDA NetCell Client installed on a handheld computer device with a wireless connection 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 143 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Sys
312. rded images from the cameras in the selected view This way you are able to browse recorded images Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Browse tab Depending on your user rights access to browsing images from some cameras may be restricted Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings Illustrations in this help topic and date and time formats used in these illustrations are thus for guidance only The Browse tab provides you with a number of advanced features for browsing recorded images In addition to image browsing features the Browse tab also lets you print images and export AVIs movie clips and JPEGs still images Selecting a View You are able to select a view for display on the Browse tab in two ways By selecting the required view in the Browse tab s Views section By selecting the required view from the Views list located in the upper part of the window Enlarging Images from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the blue title bar above the image Double clicking blue bar above image enlarges view To return to normal view simply double click the blue title bar again Tip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when viewed enlarged 222 Route 59 Suite 303 S
313. re is available in the NetGuard EVS only Audio Ability to listen to live sound from the selected camera s audio device available only if camera has audio device attached Note The Audio feature is available in the NetGuard EVS only In the Browse column the following features all selected by default are available Browse Ability to browse recorded images from the selected camera AVI JPG Export Ability to generate and export evidence as movie clips in the AVI format and as still images in the JPG format Database Export Ability to generate and export evidence in database format Note The Database Export feature is available in the NetGuard EVS only Sequences Ability to use the Sequences feature for browsing images from a selected camera Smart Search Ability to use the NetGuard EVS client s Smart Search feature with which users are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from the selected camera Note The Smart Search feature is available in the NetGuard EVS only Tip Note that some of the features are mutually dependent For example in order have access to PTZ or output features a user must also have access to viewing live images and in order to use AVI and JPG export a user must have access to browsing recorded images 6 Repeat as required for other users NetGuard EVS The NetGuard EVS provides remote users with extremely feature rich access to the surveillance syst
314. re recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur The SMS settings window Access To access the SMS settings window click the Sms Settings button in the General Settings window Enabling SMS Alerts You enable the use of SMS alerts by selecting the Enable SMS check box Note When enabling the use of SMS alerts also consider the SMS alert schedules configured for each camera in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Specifying SMS Alert Settings Having selected the Enable SMS check box specify SMS alert settings in the following fields GSM modem con to Select port connecting the computer running NetDVR to the GSM modem SIM card PIN code Specify PIN code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem SIM card PUK code Specify PUK code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem SMS Central Phone No Specify the number of the SMS central to which the GSM modem should connect in order to send an SMS Recipient Phone No Specify the number of the telephone to which SMS alerts should be sent Message Specify required message text for SMS alerts Message text must be no longer that 100 characters and must only contain the following characters a z A Z 0 9 as well as commas and full stops Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in SMS alerts 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel
315. re than one input event the button will open the Multiple Input Events window in which you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 70 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc events Timer Events When you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select a defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events When clicked the button will open the New Timer window in which you are able to specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the input event under which they are defined Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds A camera starts and the lights are switched on based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes Add new output event Opens the Add New Output window in which you are able to spec
316. red event in the window s rightmost list and click the lt lt button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Setup PTZ Patrolling window lets you configure patrol schemes for PTZ patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions for the camera The Setup PTZ Patrolling window Access To access the Setup PTZ Patrolling window click the Setup button in Patrolling section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window Note To use patrolling you must have specified at least two preset positions for the PTZ camera in question Tip Although it is technically not patrolling specifying a patrol scheme with only one preset position is possible A patrol scheme with only one preset position can when combined with scheduling be useful in two cases For moving a PTZ camera to a specific position at a specific time and for moving a PTZ camera to a specific position upon manual PTZ control of the camera Note When you have defined your patrol schemes also remember to schedule use of the patrol schemes in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Note Bear in mind that patrolling can be overridden if operators with the necessary user rights manually control PTZ cameras Patrol Scheme A PTZ camera may patrol according to several d
317. red the camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames per second you will experience an average of 1 frame per second when viewing video from the camera on your NetGuard EVS client s Live tab If your administrator had configured the camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second you would with Frame Rate set to Low in your NetGuard EVS experience an average of 0 2 frames per second when viewing video from the camera on the Live tab 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 173 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc IPIX Split Mode Available only if the selected camera is an IPIX camera IPIX is a technology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images The NetGuard EVS supports up to four different viewpoints from a single IPIX camera The IPIX Split Mode list lets you select the required spilt mode One by One lets you view a single viewpoint Two by Two lets you view four different viewpoints at a time When viewed on any of the NetGuard EVS client s tabs the IPIX camera will appear as specified with either one or four viewpoints from the same image Tip When viewing different viewpoints from an IPIX camera on the Live or Browse tabs you are able to navigate each viewpoint independently by clicking inside each viewpoint or by using the buttons in the Live or Browse tabs PTZ Control sections Ma
318. reset position name is deleted it will appear as undefined in the list Move up Move down Lets you move a preset position selected in the list up and down respectively The selected preset position is moved one step per click By moving preset position up or down you are able to control the sequence in which available preset positions are presented in the Monitor application and in the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS In the Monitor preset position buttons are grouped in five preset banks A E of five buttons each 1 5 By moving a preset position up or down you can thus determine which preset bank and which button number should be used for a particular preset position In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users select preset positions from a list By moving a preset position up or down in the Preset Positions section s list you can thus determine the sequence in which preset positions are presented in the NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s list Display of preset positions in Monitor Administrators are able to specify the sequence in which available preset positions are displayed in the various applications 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 42 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Preset Position on Events Section If you have specified input or VMD events event buttons or generic events you are able to make the PTZ camera aut
319. ress and port of the server running the Image Server service Outside IP Address Lets you specify a public IP address for use when the server should be available from the internet 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 148 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Outside Port Lets you specify a port number for use when the server should be available from the internet The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Local IP Ranges Opens the Define local IP ranges window in which you are able to define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Background When a NetGuard or NetGuard EVSconnects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact IP addresses goes on in the background completely automatically and transparent to users However when a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS on a local network connects to a surveillance system which is also on the local network the Image Server may if different subnets are involved not recognize the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS client s IP address as being local When this is the case the Image Server may not return a suitable IP address to the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS for further communication between the two Therefore you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the Image Serve
320. rolling has been enabled Note that pausing applies for the selected camera other PTZ cameras may still patrol Depending on configuration the pause may automatically time out after a while Note PTZ patrolling and PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually Viewer The Viewer lets you browse and play back recordings from cameras defined by the surveillance system administrator The Viewer also lets you print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats Note Certain user rights may be required in order to use the Viewer ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Access You access the Viewer from the Monitor application by clicking the Viewer button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 130 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The Viewer s Toolbar The Viewer s toolbar lets you quickly switch between the Viewer s different features Icons in the toolbar server as shortcuts to the features available from the File and Tools menus in the Viewer s menu bar When you select a feature in the toolbar settings for the feature typically become available in the Viewer s control panel located in the lower part of the window below the camera layout Depending on your rights not all of the following toolba
321. roximately 10 However the database export process will take considerably longer when compression is used 9 If you want to encrypt the exported database select the Encrypt Exported Database check box If you select encryption specify a password for subsequent decryption of the exported databases and remember to send the password to the recipient separately Note that when encryption is used the database export process as well as subsequent opening of the database in order to view its content will take considerably longer than when no encryption is used 10 Specify export destination in the export dialog s Export Destination section Desktop If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of your PC 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 189 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Path If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported database will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 11 If you want to inclu
322. rted Images folder to the root of a CD or DVD will make the CD DVD start automatically when the recipient inserts it Frequently Asked Questions about Exporting Can I export audio as well When exporting in the database format you are when the surveillance system supports audio able to include audio in the export When exporting in the AVI or JPEG formats you cannot include audio Can I export digitally zoomed images If you used digital zoom prior to exporting you will when exporting in the AVI or JPEG formats be able to select whether to export the regular images or the digitally zoomed images When exporting in the database format it will not be necessary to make such a selection as recipients will be able to use digital zoom on the exported recordings Can I export IPIX recordings Yes provided your surveillance system supports the use of IPIX cameras i e cameras using a special technology for recording 360 images When exporting recordings from an IPIX camera be aware that it is only possible to export the fisheye view itself not a flattened IPIX view a 2 2 split IPIX view or zoomed IPIX views Message texts may under particular circumstances appear in white letters across one or more of a view s camera positions 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 190 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example of camera me
323. rveillance system administrator if in doubt If you select sound notifications for more than one camera you may also hear more notifications again depending on the surveillance system s event configuration Tip By default the NetGuard EVS uses a simple sound file for its sound notifications The sound file called Notification wav is located in the NetGuard EVS installation folder If you want to use another wav file as your notification sound simply name the required file Notification wav and place it in the NetGuard EVS installation folder instead of the original file The file Notification wav is used for event as well as motion detection notifications it is not possible to use different sound files for different cameras or to distinguish between event and motion detection notifications 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 175 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Apply to All The Apply To All button lets you quickly apply the camera settings for the selected camera to all cameras in the view Note Even though joystick control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras not all PTZ cameras may be joystick controlled Refer to the release note for information about joystick support for cameras When a new joystick is detected by the NetGuard EVS a default PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom configuration for the joystick is added automatically H
324. rveillance Systems Inc Which Types of Groups are You Able to Edit Views in Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit views in the following types of groups Private and shared Private but not shared Shared but not private None at all To quickly determine which types of groups your user rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following 1 Select the NetGuard client s Setup tab Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab If you are not able to access the Setup tab you are unable to create views 2 On the Setup tab look at the Views section The Group folders to which you do not have access will be indicated by padlock icons Consult your system administrator if in doubt about your user rights Using Static Images in Views You are not limited to using camera images in a view you are able to use static images such as GIF or JPEG as well To use a static image in a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Static Image link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position When you release the mouse button the Choose File window opens letting you select the required static image file Using HTML Pages in Views In addition to viewing camera images and static images in a view you are able to import HTML pages and display them in the view This way
325. s Inc Tip You can also assign shortcut numbers to cameras in the Camera Name and Number window Tip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in the NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts Camera Type Lets you select whether the camera on the selected camera channel is Fixed or Moveable Fixed Camera mounted in a fixed position Moveable PTZ camera Device Port Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Lets you select which control port on the video server should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on the camera Port Address Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Lets you specify port address of the camera The port address would normally be 0 or 1 If using daisy chained PTZ cameras the port address will identify each of them and you should verify your settings with those recommended in the cameras manuals Camera Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Adding Cameras In NetDVR you do not have to worry about having to add individual cameras to the system Cameras are connected to devices so once you have added the required devices to your NetDVR system see How to Add a Device all cameras connected to the devices are connected to the system as well Configuring Cameras You are able to specify a wide variet
326. s images from each camera specified by the system administrator Depending on the system administrator s settings in the Administrator application the camera layout may contain images from up to 64 different cameras Image Bars Each camera from which images are displayed in the camera layout is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera image The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the camera layout the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 123 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Camera image enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar also features three colored indicators Event indicator the leftmost of the three indicators solid yellow Lights up when events specified in the Administrator application occur Click anywhere inside the image to reset the event indicator This indicator may appear black if event indication has not been specified for the camera in question of if no specified events have occurred Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Motion indicator the indicator in the middle sol
327. s may not be able to access all three tabs Required HTML syntax Live tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowLive gt Browse tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowBrowse gt Setup tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowSetup gt Tip For advanced users it is possible to create many other types of buttons using the approximately 100 different function calls available for the NetGuard EVS See NetGuard EVS Scripting for more information In the following we have created two shared groups in the NetGuard EVS We have called them Group1 and Group2 Each group contains two views called View1 and View2 We have also created an HTML page with buttons allowing users to switch between our four different views as well as between two of the NetGuard EVS s tabs Live and Browse When viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 180 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc HTML page with buttons for navigating between views and tabs We have saved the HTML page locally in this case on the user s C drive When the HTML page is to be used for navigation saving the HTML page locally is necessary because of security features in Internet Explorer When saving the HTML page locally save it at a loca
328. s must begin with CTRL or ALT Example CTRL B i e first pressing the CTRL key then while still pressing the CTRL key pressing the B key This will display the pressed key combination in the Press shortcut key field 4 In the Select action list select the required action for the shortcut key combination Note Some actions will only work when the keyboard shortcut is used in certain contexts For example a keyboard shortcut with a PTZ related action will only work when using a PTZ camera 5 In the Use new shortcut in list select when the shortcut key combination should apply Global When working on any of the NetGuard EVS client s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Browse Mode When working on the NetGuard EVS client s Browse tab only Live Mode When working on the NetGuard EVS client s Live tab only Setup Mode When working on the NetGuard EVS client s Setup tab only 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 178 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 6 Click the Assign button This will add the specified shortcut key combination to the Assigned keys list Example of user defined keyboard shortcuts 7 Click OK Tip Your shortcut key combinations are kept as part of your user settings on the surveillance system server This means that you will be able to use your shortcut key combinations on any computer that
329. s not all users may have access to all cameras on the surveillance system Note Due to the large amount of new features in the latest NetGuard EVS version 3 0 views created in NetGuard EVS version 3 0 will not work in previous versions of the NetGuard EVS If creating shared views in NetGuard EVS version 3 0 it is thus important that the users with whom you wish to share the views also use NetGuard EVS version 3 0 To create a view under a shared top level folder you first create a group under the required shared top level folder then create the required view within the group 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 163 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc If you have created shared views before you may create the new view in an existing group or you may create a new group for the view Creating a Group To create a group under a shared top level folder do the following on the Setup tab 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the required shared top level folder in this example the required folder is simply called Shared 2 Click the Create New Group button 3 A new group is created The new group is simply named New Group 4 Overwrite the default name New Group with a group name of your choice You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View within the Group To create a view in a group do the fol
330. s performed By default exported databases as well as the export log file are placed in an Exported Images folder on the desktop of the computer on which the export was performed Note however that the export location may be changed as part of the export process Export log files are named according to the structure ExportYYYMMDD log e g Export20053112 log Note however that database exports may be encrypted and or compressed in which case export log files are also encrypted compressed and further file extensions such as mzi or men may appear in export log file names Web Server Log Files These files log activity on the Web Server if logging is enabled in the NetDVRHTTP Server window By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVR software Web Server log files are named according to the structure www_YYYYMMDD log e g www_20051231 log Log File Structures Most log files generated by NetDVR use a shared structure complying with the W3C Extended Log File Format Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines The header outlines the information contained in the log lines The log lines consist of two main parts the log information itself and an encrypted part The encrypted part makes it possible through decryption and comparison to assert that a log file has not been tampered with 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com
331. s the name of the audio source If required you are able to overwrite the existing audio source name with a new one Enabled Lets you enable disable use of the audio source Tip You can also enable disable an audio source in the Administrator window right 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 49 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc click the required audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section the select Disable or Enable from the menu that appears Note On some devices audio can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If audio on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to audio being disabled on the device itself Monitor Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Installation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Monitor Manager window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Monitor Manager window lets
332. s through Web and Realtime Feed Servers Server End Providing Access Through a NetPDA NetCell Client Use of the NetPDA NetCell Client requires that a matching NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on the surveillance system The NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the NetDVR system s Image Server on which user rights are defined The NetPDA NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA NetCell Client and the Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance images to fit the screen layout of the NetPDA NetCell Client For more information see Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server Your organization s choice of remote access solution will depend on the organization s requirements Deciding Which Remote Access Solution to Use When deciding which remote access solution is the best choice for your organization system administrators may find it helpful to review the following 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 144 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Note Systems and requirements differ from organization to organization The following questions and answers are thus for guidance only Do you require a NetPDA based solution Yes Use the NetPDA NetCell Client Server solution If required you can
333. s to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in images from the camera Tip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in images from the camera 3 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 4 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list How to Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVR such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define events base
334. sarily be used on your surveillance system Camera shortcut numbers are defined on the surveillance system server ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt ENTER Changes the camera displayed in the selected view position to the position s default camera ENTER Changes the cameras displayed in all view positions to the positions default cameras lt view shortcut number gt ENTER Changes the selected view to the view with the matching shortcut number Example if the required view has the shortcut number 8 you would press 8 ENTER Note that view shortcut numbers may not necessarily be used If view shortcut numbers are used you will be able to see them in the Views section where they will appear in brackets before the views names View shortcut numbers are defined on the NetGuard EVS client s Setup tab ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 6 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step to the right 4 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step to the left 8 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step up 2 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step down Note Above listed shortcuts can be used when working with the following types of view positions regular camera positions hotspots carousels HTML pages They cannot be used for view positions with NetMatrix content or static images Loggin
335. selected and the Monitor s Output button is clicked In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to trigger outputs by selecting them from a list To specify an output for manual triggering in the Monitor or NetGuard NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list Note An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way but only the top eight outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no limitations to the number of available outputs You are able to determine each output s position among the Monitor s output buttons or the NetGuard s and NetGuard EVS s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list
336. should be added to the AVI file d In the Codec list select the video codec compression decompression technology you want to use for generating the AVI file The Codec list only lists codecs supporting the resolution of the camera Tip If available the codecs Indeo Video 5 10 or Microsoft Video 1 are recommended e Click the Next button to start the export Export format Database files a Select required Export Path if you keep the default setting the database files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop b Select whether the Viewer program files should be included in the export If you include the Viewer in the export the exported databases can be viewed on any PC c Click Next Fill in the Operator and Operator s Note fields d Click Next and select whether to encrypt and or compress the exported databases If you select encryption specify a password for decrypting the exported databases and remember to send the password to the recipient separately e Click the Next button to start the export Tip If you included the Viewer application in your export copying all exported files to the root of a CD or DVD will start the CD DVD automatically when the recipient inserts it 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 141 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Export format JPG WAV files a Select r
337. should define users You do this by clicking the ImageServer Administrator window s User Setup button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 154 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To define access rights for a particular user do the following in the Define User Rights window 1 In the User list select the required user 2 In the Global User Rights section select the user s global i e non camera specific rights View Live Ability to view the Live tab in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right the Live tab will not be selectable in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Browse Ability to view the Browse tab in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right the Browse tab will not be selectable in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Setup Ability to view the Setup tab in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right the Setup tab will not be selectable in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Edit Shared Views Ability to create and edit views in shared groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Views placed in shared groups can be accessed by every NetGuard NetGuard EVS user for more information about views see Creating Views NetGuard and How to Create and Manage Views NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right shared groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS will be protected indicated by a pad
338. specifies that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package the generic event should be triggered Your generic event may be different but you can still use the principles outlined in the following 1 In the Administrator window first select a camera from which you are able to view images in the Monitor or in a NetGuard NetGuard EVS then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 2 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Event Notifications button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 105 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc This will open the Setup Notifications on Events window 3 In the Setup Notifications on Events window s Available Events list expand the Generic item and select your generic event Then click the gt gt button to move the selected generic event to the Active Events list Note Make sure that your generic event is the only event appearing in the Active Events list while you are performing the test otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event which triggers the event notification Once you are done testing you can move any temporarily removed events back to the Active Events list 4 Click OK in the Setup Notifications on Events window click OK in the Camera Settings for Device Name
339. specify information in the following fields Timer event name Specify a name for the timer event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Timer event occurs after Specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event in either seconds or minutes When ready click OK 3 In the window from which you opened the New Timer window your newly defined timer event will now be listed Timer event in this example associated with a VMD event listed in I O Setup window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 108 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Timer event associated with an event button listed in Event Buttons window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Timer event associated with a generic event listed in Generic Events window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the word Generic as well as the required main event to see the timer event Click OK to return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be
340. ssage text Possible messages listed alphabetically are After Database End Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that the time selected is after the time of the last recording in the camera s database The last image in the camera s database will be shown in the camera position in order to indicate that recordings from the camera are available but only from a time earlier than the selected time Before Database Start Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that the time selected is before the time of the first recording in the camera s database The first image in the camera s database will be shown in the camera position in order to indicate that recordings from the camera are available but only from a time later than the selected time Connected to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Indicates that a connection to the camera has been established Connecting to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Indicates that a connection to the camera is currently being established Connection refused Reason Indicates that connecting to the camera in question is not allowed for example because your rights to access recordings from the camera have been changed by the surveillance system administrator Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Connection to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number lost Reconnecting Indicates that con
341. strator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only lets you specify the settings for an input event on devices capable of handling one input event only The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only Access You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new event button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Add new event button is clicked Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the NetDVR release note to verify that input controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 72 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one in
342. t You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button to open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events in which you specify a name for the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it When you click OK in the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events the selected input event is automatically transferred from Available Input Event s list to the Enabled Input Event s list lt lt Lets you move an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list to the Available Input Event s list thus disabling it Edit Lets you edit the settings for an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events lets you specify the settings for a particular input event on devices capable of handling several input events 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 74 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events Access You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events by cl
343. t Surveillance Systems Inc Good to know Remote Viewing of Live Images from Stopped Cameras NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are able to view live images from cameras even though the cameras in question are stopped This however requires that a particular setting in the Administrator application is enabled Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights To enable the required setting open the Administrator application and do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the General Settings button This will open the General Settings window 2 In the General Settings window s Advanced section select Start cameras on remote live requests 3 Click OK The Image Server s Define local IP ranges window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Define local IP ranges window Access You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges button in the ImageServer Administrator window To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window do the following 1 Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window s first field and the end of the IP address range in the second field 2 Click the Add button The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of the Define local IP ranges wind
344. t buttons to find the required zoom level When you have zoomed in on an area of an image you are able to move around within the zoomed image by clicking the arrow buttons To quickly return to normal view of the selected image i e without zoom click the H i e home button Tip To move around within the zoomed image you may also simply click and drag the image in the required direction Smoothening and Scaling To digitally smoothen images from the camera select the Smooth Images check box To display images from the selected camera in the resolution they were recorded in select the Scale 1 1 check box If images are larger than the resolution available in the camera layout s camera slot they will be reduced in size to fit the camera slot The correct aspect ratio will be maintained when reducing size this way 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 138 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Printing Sending and Exporting Evidence With the Viewer you have several options for generating video and audio evidence You are able to Print evidence Send evidence via e mail Export entire video and audio sequences in three different formats Viewer How to You are able to save particular configurations of the Viewer s camera layout as so called views and switch between them using the Views menu in the Viewer s m
345. t may depending on your selected export settings take a while You can continue to use the NetGuard for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished Upon completion you are able to view and distribute the exported file Example AVI file viewed in the Winamp player other common players include the Windows Media Player and the RealPlayer You are able to use the following keyboard shortcuts in the NetGuard On All Tabs CTRL 1 Go to Live tab CTRL 2 Go to Browse tab CTRL 3 Go to Setup tab CTRL DOWN ARROW Go to the next view in the Views list located in the upper part of the window CTRL UP ARROW Go to the previous view in the Views list located in the upper part of the window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 215 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc On Live Tab Only PLUS SIGN PTZ camera zoom in MINUS SIGN PTZ camera zoom out UP ARROW PTZ camera move up DOWN ARROW PTZ camera move down LEFT ARROW PTZ camera move left RIGHT ARROW PTZ camera move right HOME numeric keypad only PTZ camera move up and left END numeric keypad only PTZ camera move down and left PAGE UP numeric keypad only PTZ camera move up and right PAGE DOWN numeric
346. t with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority e g two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered Event Rule String Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields and buttons in the Event rule string section Field Button Description Event substring Lets you specify the individual items that NetDVR should look out for when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples Single term User001 when added to the Event message include field the term will appear as User001 Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message include field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as e g User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence If the terms must appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one i e so they will appear as
347. tDVR logging in About Logging Audit Log Section Audit logging is the logging of NetGuard and NetGuard EVS user actions If this type of logging is required select the Enable Audit Logging check box When audit logging is enabled you are able to specify the following values Days to log Number of days in which audit log files should be kept before they are overwritten Default is 30 days If you specify 0 zero audit log files will be kept indefinitely disk storage space permitting Minimum Logging Interval Minimum number of seconds between logged events Specifying a high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce the size of the audit log Default is 60 seconds In Sequence Timespan Maximum number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be considered to be within the same sequence Specifying a high number of seconds may thus help limit the number of viewed sequences logged and reduce the size of the audit log Default is ten seconds Tip Read more about NetDVR logging in About Logging Language Support and XML Encoding Section In the Language Support and XML Encoding section select the language character set used on the NetDVR server This will ensure that the right language and character encoding is used in clients communication with the server 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 150 Remote Access On Ne
348. tabase will automatically be overwritten A database can contain up to 600 000 records 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 28 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Delete records older than Select this option to limit the database size based on the age of records in the database Specify required number in neighboring field and select required unit Minutes Hours or Days from the list When records become older than the specified number of minutes hours or days they will automatically be deleted Note A database can contain no more than 600 000 records regardless of what maximum age has been defined Clear Database Click button to delete all records stored in the database for the camera in question WARNING Use with caution all records in the database for the camera will be permanently deleted As a security measure you will be asked to confirm that you want to permanently delete all stored records for the camera Records stored in archived databases will not be affected Note If the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available To make the button available do the following If the Monitor application is running shut it down If the Recording Server service is running pause it by clicking the Administrator window s Service Manager button then clicking the Pause butto
349. tem Server Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server and Advanced Server Windows XP Professional 32 and 64 bit or Windows Server 2003 32 and 64 bit CPU Intel P4 or higher Xeon recommended minimum 2 4 GHz RAM Minimum 1 GB Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Adapter AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 768 16 bit colors Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 rpm or faster Hard Disk Space 80 GB free depends on number of cameras and recording settings Software DirectX 9 0 or newer required to run the live view Monitor application To run the NetPDA NetCell Server the following is required Internet Information Services IIS 5 0 or later as well as Microsoft Net Framework 1 1 Tip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab Should the server require a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads Tip Information about how to verify install Microsoft Net Framework and IIS versions is available in Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server NetGuard EVS NetGuard NetPDA NetCell Server The NetPDA NetCell Server is typically installed on the surveillance system server see the system requir
350. tems Inc Example of NetPDA NetCell Client user interface The way remote access is handled at the surveillance system server end is different depending on remote access method Server End Providing Access through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Images viewed by NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are provided by the NetDVR surveillance system s Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the NetDVR server it does not require separate hardware The NetDVR system administrator uses the Image Server Administrator window to manage NetGuard andNetGuard EVSaccess to the surveillance system Server End Providing Access Through Regular Browser As an alternative to using NetGuard or NetGuard EVS images can also be provided through the NetDVR surveillance system s built in Web Server and Realtime Feed Server When this is the case remote users connect to the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server through a regular browser no client software is required The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server do by no means offer as advanced functionality as the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS neither at the server end nor at the client end However if remote users are to access the surveillance system through very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections using the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server may be advisable For a remote user perspective of regular browser access through the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server see Remote Acces
351. the view Depending on the navigation features you have included on your HTML page you may often want to import the HTML page into several views in order for the navigation to fully work 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 219 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc System Administrator s Check List NetDVR system administrators wishing to create and distribute navigation HTML pages to NetGuard users do the following 1 Create the required HTML page The navigation controls in the HTML page must match the views users see in their NetGuard For example in order for a button leading to View1 to work a view called View1 must exist If you intend to distribute a navigation HTML page to a group of users the views in which the HTML page will be used should be placed in shared groups 2 Save the HTML page locally on each computer on which it will be used When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations 3 Verify that the NetGuard in which the HTML page will be used are locally installed versions If not download and install the NetGuard software on each
352. the Monitor application 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 58 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Tip Configuration of user rights may vary from organization to organization However users are typically allowed access to the following features Application Setup Browser PTZ Control and Quick Browse Patrolling Settings Note Settings in this section are relevant only if you are using PTZ cameras for which patrolling has been set up The regular patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted either manually or when a particular event occurs The Patrolling settings section lets you specify how many seconds should pass before the regular patrolling is resumed after a manual or event based interruption Default is 30 seconds The settings in this section will apply for all installed PTZ cameras Tip PTZ patrolling for individual PTZ cameras is configured in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window Joystick Clicking the Joystick Setup opens the Joystick Setup window in which you are able to configure a joystick for use with PTZ cameras in the Monitor application Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installin
353. the hotspot The effect of your selection can be illustrated by the following table Effect Unlimited Medium Low JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame MPEG IFrame Send all frames Send all frames Send all frames MPEG PFrame Send all frames Do not send any frames Do not send any frames Example If you set the Frame Rate option to Low in your NetGuard EVS and your surveillance system administrator has configured a camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames per second you will experience an average of 1 frame per second when viewing video from the camera in the NetMatrix position If your administrator had configured a camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second you would with Frame Rate set to Low in your NetGuard EVS experience an average of 0 2 frames per second when viewing video from the camera in the NetMatrix position Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the NetMatrix position this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images This setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the selected NetMatrix position NetMatrix Window Lets you change the NetMatrix position s ranking
354. the user s current Windows login Note Some authentication methods are only available if the NetGuard EVS user logs in to certain surveillance systems see Surveillance System Differences Parameters You are able to use the following parameters ServerAddress Refers to the URL of the server to which the NetGuard EVS should connect if connecting to a OnSSI NetEVS system this would be the URL of the Management Server if connecting to a NetDVMS or NetDVR system it would be the URL of the Image Server The following example would show the NetGuard EVS client s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver Keep in mind that the NetGuard EVS s default authentication type is Windows authentication current user Unless you change this through using the AutheticationType parameter described in the following the login dialog will look like this from the user s point of view i e automatically displaying the name of the current Windows user in the User name field 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 183 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc UserName Refers to a specific user name The following example would show the NetGuard EVS client s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field and Tommy in the dialog s User name field Client exe Serv
355. ther top level folders depend entirely upon what has been configured on the surveillance system server The fact that the Views section contains one or more top level folders for accessing shared views does not in itself guarantee that shared views are actually available To verify if any shared views are available under the top level folders expand the folders 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 161 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Tip You can use your views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed This is because information about your views is stored centrally on the surveillance system server as part of your user login information Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit the following types of views Private and shared Private but not shared Shared but not private Neither private nor shared in which case you simply rely on shared views created by others Typically only a few people in an organization are able to create and edit shared views For example the surveillance system administrator may create and maintain a number of shared views When relevant NetGuard EVS users log in the shared views will automatically be available to them and they will basically not need to create further views unless they want their own private views Checking which
356. tied to your user login and can therefore be used on any computer with a NetGuard EVS your joystick setup will be tied to your user login as well as to the specific computer on which you configured the joystick setup This means that your joystick setup will only work on the computer on which is has been configured The simple reason for this is that different computers are likely to have different joysticks attached If you want to use a joystick with the NetGuard EVS on more than one computer you must configure the NetGuard EVS client s joystick setup on each computer You are able to assign your own custom shortcut key combinations to particular actions in the NetGuard EVS Tip The NetGuard EVS also features a small number of standard keyboard shortcuts immediately ready for use See Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts for more information 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 177 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc To assign custom shortcut key combinations do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS client s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Keyboard Setup The Keyboard Setup window appears Keyboard Setup window 3 When the Keyboard Setup window appears click inside the Press shortcut key field then press the required key combination Note Custom key combination
357. tion has been disabled will be highlighted in the camera s images when viewed in the Monitor Default highlighting color is blue Tip You are able to change the color used to highlight areas with disabled motion detection by clicking the Region Color button in the Exclude Regions Settings section Area with disabled motion detection highlighted in red when viewed in Monitor Default highlighting color is blue Update on motion only Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected the camera s images will only be updated in the Monitor when motion is detected Disabled Cameras are by default enabled meaning that images from the cameras are by default transferred to NetDVR provided that the cameras are marked as online also default in the Camera Alert Scheduler window If required you can disable the camera When the camera is disabled no images will be transferred from the camera to NetDVR Note If the Monitor application is installed and images from a camera are displayed in the 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 26 Administrator Applicat
358. tion to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations We then imported the HTML page into the required NetGuard EVS views When importing the HTML page we made sure to select Enable HTML scripting in the HTML page s Properties on the Setup tab Selecting Enable HTML scripting ensures that the scripting required for the buttons to work is automatically inserted in the HTML page Example of an HTML Page with Image Map Navigation You may also create an HTML page with more advanced content for example an image map allowing users to switch between views In the following example we have kept the two groups and two views from the previous example Instead of using buttons we have created an HTML page with an image of a floor plan and created an image map based on the floor plan Viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this HTML page with image map for navigating between views 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 181 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc How you structure and create an image map is of course highly individual For this example we divided the floor plan into four colored zones and defined a
359. tions NetDVR is Compatible with a wide range of different IP video products from the leading manufacturers so you choose the hardware you want in combinations too Dependable with robust and stable performance proven in operation on thousands of cameras worldwide Flexible with remote access features that let you use the surveillance system from any place and at any time Scalable with open architecture based on IP technology with ongoing development and regular updates which gives you long term returns on your surveillance investment Future safe the IP network approach is the foundation for tomorrow available today Included Components NetDVR consists of a number of components each targeted at specific tasks and user types The Administrator The main application used by surveillance system administrators for configuring the NetDVR surveillance system server upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras or users to the system The Recording Server A vital part of the surveillance system recordings are only transferred to NetDVR while the recording server is running The recording server may be installed in two ways Either as an application the Monitor application or as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Image Server Handles access to the surveillance
360. to the Viewable by selected user list 5 For each camera now listed in the Viewable by selected user list specify the features to which the user should have access by selecting the features in the User Rights for the Selected Camera section Note that the features are listed in two columns the left column lists features related to live viewing the right column lists features related to browsing existing recordings In the Live column the following features all selected by default are available Live Ability to view live images from the selected camera PTZ Ability to use the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS client s navigation features for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras A user will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras PTZ Preset Positions Ability to use the NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s navigation features for moving a PTZ camera to particular preset positions A user will only be able to use this right if 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 155 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc having access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined preset positions Outputs Ability to trigger outputs e g switching on lights sounding sirens or similar if such outputs are available Events Ability to use the NetGuard EVS client s Event feature for manually triggering events Note The Event featu
361. to the device Upon completion of the wizard the name will be used when listing devices and associated cameras in the Administrator window s Device Manager section The name may for example refer to the physical location of the camera s attached to the device 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 18 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Assigning a name to the device Tip You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for window in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control The latter requires that the camera is a PTZ Pan tilt Zoom camera 7 Click Finish 8 The device will be listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section To view a list of cameras attached to the device click the plus sign next to the device name Tip Cameras are listed for each device with default names such as Camera 1 etc If you want to change the name of a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears Tip Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that images from the cameras are by default transferred to NetDVR provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default If required you can disable a camera listed in the Device M
362. to which NetDVR should analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs Tip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters such as etc within the text string to be analyzed 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 90 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The Edit Event window for editing generic events Access You access the Edit Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window by selecting an event from the list then clicking the Edit selected button The Edit Event window for editing generic events is divided into three sections General Event Settings Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields in the General Event settings section Field Description Event Name Lest you edit the name of the event Each event must have a unique name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Event Protocol Lets you select which protocol NetDVR should listen for in order to detect the event Any Listen for packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol TCP Listen for packages using TCP protocol only UDP Listen for packages using UDP protocol only Which port is use
363. tor application is installation dependent and available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Clicking the PTZ Menu button in the Monitor application s control panel gives you access to a menu for controlling a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera selected in the Monitor s camera layout Example of PTZ Menu with preset position buttons Note The PTZ menu is only functional when the camera selected in the Monitor application s camera layout is a PTZ camera Use of the PTZ Menu may require certain user rights 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 128 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc PTZ Menu s Navigation Buttons The PTZ Menu s navigation buttons let you move the PTZ camera in steps Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position Moves the PTZ camera to the right Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right PTZ Menu s Zoom Buttons and S
364. tor is used for indicating that images are received from a camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 38 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Specifying Events for which Event Indication Should Be Used To specify which events should trigger an event indication for the camera do the following for each required event 1 In the Available Events list select the required event Tip You are not limited to events associated with a particular device You are able to select between all available events input events timer events event buttons from all cameras on the NetDVR surveillance system 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected event to the Active Events list When an event listed in the Active Events list occurs the event indicator will light up 3 Repeat for each required event To remove an event from the Active Events list select the event in question and click the lt lt button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window lets you view and for many but not all PTZ cameras define preset positions for the PTZ camera The PTZ Preset Positions for Devi
365. torage capacity required for archiving consider your organization s needs then plan for worst case rather than best case scenarios Backing Up Archives Many organizations want to back up recordings from cameras using tape drives or similar Creating such backups based on the content of camera databases is not recommended it may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 118 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Instead create such backups based on the content of archives If you have not specified separate archiving locations for separate cameras you could simply back up the default local archiving directory Archives When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving time Viewing Archived Recordings You view archived recordings in the Viewer or NetGuard EVS This way you are able to use all of Viewer s or NetGuard EVS client advanced features image browsing smart search evidence generation etc for archived recordings as well Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply use the Viewer s or NetGuard EVS s browsing features for example the timeline browser or the playback controls for finding and viewing the required recordings just like you would with recor
366. trict remote access you must define user accounts i e user names and passwords for the remote users Defining User Accounts To define user names and passwords for remote users click the User setup button This will open the User administration window in which you define individual user names and their associated passwords To add a user click the User administration window s Add user button specify the required user name and password and click OK This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click the Delete user button Defining Access Rights Three different types of access right are available Allow anonymous access Allows unrestricted access users will not have to specify a user name or password to access Access for predefined users only Allows access only to users you have defined by clicking the User setup button Those users must provide their user name and password when accessing after which they will have access to all available cameras Restrict user access by camera Allows access only to users you have defined by clicking the User setup button You are able to restrict those users access to particular cameras and features as described in the following Restricting Defined Users Access When you select the option Restrict user access by camera you are able to restrict defin
367. ttempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be deleted Repair Archive if fails Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be archived This action is recommended if archiving is enabled for the camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 29 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Delete no repair If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be deleted Archive no repair Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be archived Tip An archived corrupt database can be repaired by the Viewer Open the Viewer and attempt to browse the archived recordings from the camera in question Browsing will initially fail but this will make the Viewer start repairing the corrupt database When the contents of the local database for the camera are either deleted or archived the database is reset and will be ready for storing new recordings Note No images can be recorded while the database is being repaired For large installations a repair may take several hours especially if the Repair Scan Delete if fails action involving two different repair methods
368. uations When you open the Administrator application by selecting it from Windows Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop This will only be the case when access to the Administrator application has been password protected When you click the Admin Login button to access the Administrator from the Monitor application When access to particular features such as control of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras in the Monitor application has been restricted to administrators only Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Administrator window the main window in the Administrator application is used by the surveillance system administrator for configuring NetDVR upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system Access You access the Administrator application by selecting it from Window s Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop If the Monitor application is installed and access from the Monitor application is enabled the Administrator application may also be accessed from the Monitor application Access to the Administrator application may be password protected in which case you will be asked to provide the administrator password in the Administrator Login window Administrator desktop shortcut The Administrator window
369. uffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 210 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Time Navigation The Browse tab s Time Navigation section provides you with controls for browsing and playing back recorded images from the camera selected in the view Master Time Area The Time Navigation section s Master Time area shows the master time and date of the recordings viewed The master time is the time to which all the cameras viewed are tied This means that when you browse recordings all the images you see in the view will in principle be from exactly the same point in time Some cameras however may only record if motion is detected Also there may be no recorded images from one or more cameras in the view matching the specified point in time When this is the case the last image in the camera s database prior to the specified point in time will be displayed in the view The Master Time area also displays the current playback speed example 1 00x indicating real time Browse Buttons The Time Navigation section s browse buttons lets you manually navigate through recordings from the camera selected in the view Previous image Moves to the image just before the one currently viewed Next image Moves to the image just after the one currently viewed Previous sequence Moves to the first image in the previous sequence Next sequence Moves to the first image in the foll
370. uire administrator rights Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your NetDVR system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera You specify events in the I O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window The Setup Notifications on Events window lets you select events for triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS The Setup Notifications on Events window Access You access the Setup Notifications on Events window from the Camera settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Event Notifications button What Is an Event Indication In the Monitor and NetGuard NetGuard EVS three different color indicators are available for each camera a yellow indicator a red indicator and a green indicator When event indication is used for a camera the yellow indicator will light up when the specified events have occurred Event indications can be valuable for camera operators as they will be able to quickly detect that an event has occurred even though their focus was perhaps on something else the moment the event occurred Available indicators the yellow indicator serves as the event indicator Tip The other two indicators serve the following purposes The red indicator lights up when motion has been detected and the green indica
371. uite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 8 Introductions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetPDA Client Operating System Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003 2003 SE Mobile 5 0 CPU Intel StrongARM or 100 compatible RAM Minimum 32 MB Network Ethernet 256 Kbit or higher recommended Graphics Adapter Minimum 320 200 16 bit colors NetMatrix Monitor Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server and Advanced Server Windows XP Professional 32 and 64 bit or Windows Server 2003 32 and 64 bit CPU Intel P3 or higher minimum 1 0 GHz RAM Minimum 256 MB Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics Adapter AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 768 16 bit colors Hard Disk Space 50 MB free 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 9 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Administrator Application For users without administrator rights access to certain features in NetDVR may in some organizations have been restricted When this is the case you will be asked to specify the administrator password in the Administrator Login window in order to get access to the restricted features The Administrator Login window You will only be asked to specify the administrator password in three sit
372. ult position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively PTZ Preset Positions If preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera you are able to select such positions from the Presets list Selecting a preset position from the list will make the PTZ camera move to the specified position 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 209 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Preset positions are defined by the system administrator the Presets list will be empty if no preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera IPIX PTZ Positions You are able to move to a specific position in an IPIX view and then save that position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button Tip You may be able to use a joystick for controlling your PTZ and IPIX cameras Joystick control is configured on the NetGuard client s Setup tab See Further Configuration Note Even though joystick and point and click control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras not all PTZ cameras may be controlled this way Refer to the release note for information about joystick and point and click support for PTZ cameras You view recorded images on the NetGuard s Browse tab When you select the NetGuard s Browse tab the NetGuard will connect to the NetDVR server and display reco
373. urrently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication User name Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case Password Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication o Users with Basic authentication or Windows authentication will have the option of selecting Remember password which will help them speed up subsequent login procedures Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature Auto login Users will have the option of selecting Auto login in which case the NetGuard EVS will automatically start up and log in with the selected authentication method each time Windows is started for Basic authentication and Windows authentication this will require that Remember password is selected Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature The Image Server s Define User Rights window lets you define access rights for NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users Define User Rights window Access You access the Define User Rights window by clicking the User Access button in the ImageServer Administrator window The button is only available if you have selected the ImageServer Administrator window s Restrict user access option button Prerequisites Before you define user rights you
374. ut The area between the timeline browser s two blue horizontal lines is a magnification of the 30 seconds preceding and following the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout You are able to specify which time span 1 hour 2 hours or 12 hours should be used in the timeline and whether the newest recordings should be indicated at the top or at the bottom of the timeline You specify this in the Settings control panel Tip Use 1 hour or 2 hour time spans for the best possible overview of recordings What to Do To browse recordings using the timeline browser click inside the timeline browser and move your mouse up or down without releasing the mouse button Browsing is fast when clicking outside the magnification area and slow when clicking inside the magnification area 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 134 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Browsing Recordings with the Playback Controls The Viewer s playback controls are used for browsing and playing recordings just like on a video recorder Playback controls Click or to browse to the oldest or the most recent recordings from the selected camera Click or to browse to the previous or next motion sequence from the selected camera Click or to browse to the previous or next image from the selected camera Use to start and sto
375. ut in the list of available outputs the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located below the Selected Outputs list This will copy the selected output to the Selected Outputs list When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the selected output will be triggered You are able to associate an event or an event button with more than one output Simply repeat the process for each required output To remove an output from the Selected Outputs list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located below the Selected Outputs list Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 95 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the I O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons available in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS in the Monitor application and NetGuard The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Access
376. ut names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered Tip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 In the Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 111 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 In the All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list which lists all o
377. utputs available for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question Good to know You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVR system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way However due to space restrictions in the Monitor only the top eight outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no such limitations 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 112 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list you are able to control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the Monitor as well as the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS By using the up and down buttons located to the right of the list you can change a selected output s position in the sequence The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for automatic triggering on detected motion This is further described in How to Add a Motion Triggered Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name win
378. utton value Hide pane onclick top showPane false gt lt br gt lt input type button value Show top title onclick top showTopTitle true gt lt br gt lt input type button value Hide top title onclick top showTopTitle false gt lt br gt lt input type button value Set time to New Year s Eve onclick top setTime Dec 31 2005 23 59 50 gt lt br gt lt body gt lt html gt Tip You may copy the HTML and modify it for an HTML page of your own When viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this HTML page with buttons for navigation We have saved the HTML page locally in this case on the user s C drive When the HTML page is to be used for navigation saving the HTML page locally is necessary because of security features in Internet Explorer When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 218 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example of an HTML Page with Image Map Navigation You may also create an HTML page with more advanced content for example an image map allowing us
379. ve approach regarding Net based software using the NetGuard will be the perfect solution for you Installation Differences The NetGuard can be installed on the remote user s computer or the user can connect to the NetDVR server and run the NetGuard straight from the server The NetGuard EVSmust always be installed on the remote user s computer Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running the NetGuard EVS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 147 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Feature Differences The NetGuard EVS offers considerably more advanced features than the NetGuard For information about the features of each client refer to NetGuard Introduction and NetGuard EVS Introduction Image Server Administration The Image Server provides access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with a NetGuard or a NetGuard EVS If the NetPDA NetCell Server front end is installed the Image Server also handles access for NetPDA NetCell Client users The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server i e the computer running the NetDVR software Surveillance system administrators use the ImageServer Administrator window to manage the Image Server s settings Access To access the ImageServer Administr
380. vent button could make a camera use a higher frame rate trigger two different outputs and send an e mail alert to three different recipients Event buttons can be global available for all cameras in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor When Events is selected Events button depressed any global event buttons as well as any event buttons for the selected camera will be displayed below the Events button Simply click an event button to trigger the associated event 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 126 Monitor Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Example of event buttons Up to eight event buttons can be displayed for each camera Event buttons are defined in the Administrator application Ask your system administrator if in doubt about using event buttons defined for use with cameras in your organization Quick Browse Available only when a hot spot is enabled Quick Browse lets you browse images from the selected camera in the hot spot Use the back and forward buttons below the Quick Browse button to move backwards and forwards Tip The Viewer offers more advanced browsing features Note Use of the Quick Browse feature may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button Mute Audio Lets you mute audio from cameras on which audio is enabled
381. vent occurs Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Multiple Input Events window is used for devices capable of handling several input events It lets you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events The Multiple Input Events window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 73 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check NetDVR release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Access You access the Multiple Input Events window by clicking the Add new event button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the device selected in the I O Setup window is capable of handling several input events Some devices are capable of handling a single input event only in which case a diff
382. vice to work with NetDVR the names of the preset positions must contain only the characters A Z a z and 0 9 and must not contain spaces If preset position names on the camera or video server device contain other characters or spaces change the preset position names on the device before selecting the Use preset positions from device feature Set Position Associates the preset position selected in the list with the position specified in the PTZ View section If the preset position selected in the list is yet undefined you will be asked to specify a name for the preset position 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 41 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Tip Since the name will appear on buttons in the Monitor application specify a name that is short enough to appear on a button If the name is too long it will be truncated when used on the button in the Monitor The NetGuard NetGuard EVS is capable of displaying even long preset position names Edit Name Lets you edit a preset position name selected in the list Only works for an already defined preset position name Test Lets you test a defined preset position Select the required preset position in the list then click the Test button The effect is displayed instantly in the PTZ View section Delete Lets you delete a preset position selected in the list When a p
383. view live images in the NetGuard the surveillance system s recording server must be running consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Depending on your user rights access to viewing live images from some cameras may be restricted 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 207 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Selecting a View You are able to select a view for display on the Live tab in two ways By selecting the required view in the Live tab s Views section By selecting the required view from the Views list located in the upper part of the window Image Bars Each camera in the view is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera image The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the view the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue Camera image enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar will display the word Live when live images are displayed and the word Stopped if the camera is stopped and live viewing is not possible Each image bar features three colored indicators Event indicator the leftmost of the three indicators solid yellow Lights u
384. w onssi com info onssi com page 174 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Will I receive lots of sound notifications If you select Always on the amount of motion related sound notifications you are likely to receive will depend on the motion detection sensitivity of the camera in question If motion detection for the camera is highly sensitive you may at times receive very frequent sound notifications The camera s motion detection sensitivity is configured on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt If you select sound notifications for more than one camera you may also hear more notifications again depending on the cameras motion detection sensitivity Tip By default the NetGuard EVS uses a simple sound file for its sound notifications The sound file called Notification wav is located in the NetGuard EVS installation foldert If you want to use another wav file as your notification sound simply name the required file Notification wav and place it in the NetGuard EVS installation folder instead of the original file The file Notification wav is used for event as well as motion detection notifications it is not possible to use different sound files for different cameras or to distinguish between event and motion detection notifications Sound on Event Note This feature is only available if using your NetGuard EVS with certain surveillance systems see Surveillance S
385. wed on the Live and Browse tabs the IPIX camera will appear as specified with either one or four viewpoints from the same image Tip When viewing different viewpoints from an IPIX camera on the Live or Browse tabs you are able to navigate each viewpoint independently by clicking inside each viewpoint or by using the buttons in the PTZ Control section Apply to All The Apply To All button lets you quickly apply the camera settings for the selected camera to all cameras in the view Configuring Joystick Control The Setup tab s Joystick Control section lets you configure joystick control of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Joystick configuration control requires that a joystick is attached to the computer running the NetGuard Note Even though joystick control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras not all PTZ cameras may be joystick controlled Refer to the release note for information about joystick support for cameras Click the Joystick Control section s Setup button to access the Joystick Setup window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 206 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The Joystick Setup window The Joystick Setup window s Joystick Axes section lets you configure the axes used for the joystick With a joystick you are typically able to navigate camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis
386. when you move the slider towards Tele and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 40 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc As an alternative to clicking the required position in the preview or using the sliders you can use the PTZ camera navigation buttons Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position Moves the PTZ camera to the right Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click Preset Positions Section Having specified a camera position in the PTZ View section you define the required position as a preset in the Preset Positions section Button Check Box Description Use preset positions from device Available only for cameras supporting this feature Check box to use preset positions defined on the camera or video server device Using preset positions from the camera or video server device will clear any preset positions you have defined for the PTZ camera you will therefore be asked to confirm your selection Note In order for preset positions from the camera or video server de
387. window in which you enable and configure the use of SMS alerts Note Use of the SMS alert feature requires that an external Siemens TC 35 GSM modem has been attached to a serial port on the computer running the NetDVR software Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Change Password window lets you change the administrator password for your NetDVR solution The Change Password window Access To access the Change Password window click the Change Password button in the General Settings window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 62 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc How to Change the Administrator Password To change the administrator password do the following 1 Specify the current administrator password in the Old password field 2 Specify the new administrator password in the New password field 3 Repeat the new administrator password in the New password confirm field 4 Click OK Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Installation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service th
388. wise inform you that your e mail client is trying to automatically send e mail messages on your behalf 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 64 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The E mail setup window Access To access the E Mail setup window click the Email Settings button in the General Settings window Enabling E Mail Alerts You enable the use of e mail alerts separately for the Monitor application or Recording Server depending on which has been installed and if applicable the Monitor application s Viewer feature Note When enabling e mail alerts also consider the e mail alert schedules configured for each camera in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Enable E Mail Monitor Recording Server Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts when the Monitor application or Recording Server depending on what has been installed is running E mail alerts will then be sent when the following conditions apply o the Monitor or Recording Server is running o motion is detected or an event for which the sending of an e mail alert has been defined occurs o motion is detected or the event occurs within a period of time for which an e mail alert schedule has been defined Enable E Mail Viewer Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application th
389. x if NetDVR should send an e mail alert if archiving fails for example because the disk is full Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Send SMS on archive error Select check box if NetDVR should send an SMS alert if archiving fails for example because the disk is full Note In order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 119 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc in the SMS settings window Daily archiving time Lists specified archiving time Archiving will take place every day at the specified time It is only possible to archive once per day To add an archiving time to the list specify the required time in the Time to add field then click the Add button To remove an archiving time from the list select the archiving time to remove from the list and click the Delete button Note While archiving takes place cameras for which archiving applies will briefly stop recording one after the other Although the pause is very brief typically less than a second it is therefore recommended that you specify an archiving time that is outside periods in which you expect to record important images Time to add Lets you add an archiving time to the Daily archiving time list
390. xporting very long sequences export may depending on your selected export settings take a while You can continue to use the NetGuard EVS for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished Upon completion you are able to view and distribute the exported file Example AVI file viewed in the Winamp player other common players include the Windows Media Player and the RealPlayer Exporting in Database Format To export video evidence in the surveillance system database format do the following Note Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings 1 Select the NetGuard EVS client s Browse tab 2 Select the view on which you want to base your export Tip You do not necessarily have to include all of the selected view s cameras in your export later in the process you will be able to specify exactly what to include in the export 3 In the Browse tab s Export section specify when the period to be covered by the export should start You do this by typing the required date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field Tip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set buttons Th
391. y of settings for each camera connected to the NetDVR system Your entry point for such camera configuration is the Administrator window To configure a camera select the required camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Administrator window s Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you have access to settings for the camera in question including How the camera should record frame rate image quality etc Where and when to store recorded images from the camera Motion detection sensitivity How images from the camera should appear when displayed in the Monitor application Triggering of notifications and external output and more 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 23 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc This also applies if you want to edit the settings for an already configured camera Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window lets you specify settings for a particular camera Example The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window for a PTZ camera Access You are able to access the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name
392. ye lens The iPIX Camera Configuration window lets you configure the IPIX functionality of a camera The iPIX Camera Configuration window Access You access the iPIX Camera Configuration window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera name window by selecting the Enable iPIX check box and clicking the iPIX Settings button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 46 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc IPIX View Adjustment The camera s IPIX functionality is configured by adjusting its IPIX view field indicated by a green ellipse in the preview image so it encloses the actual image area of the fish eye lens You do this by specifying a number of values which will be used by the IPIX technology for converting the elliptic image into an ordinary rectangular image You are able to set the ellipse s X radius Y radius X center and Y center either by specifying the required values directly in the four fields or by using the following buttons to adjust the ellipse Button Description R Decreases the radius of the IPIX view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio R Increases the radius of the IPIX view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio Rx
393. yet been defined on your NetDVR system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button This will open the Add New Output window 3 In the Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 110 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that outp
394. you are able to include company web pages intranet pages navigation pages link collections etc together with the camera images in the view Tip When your imported HTML pages contain links it is recommended that links have the target blank attribute example lt a href otherwebpage htm target blank gt Link lt a gt This will make the links open in separate windows which will help you avoid losing view of the NetGuard window itself due to a link opening a web page in the same browser window as the NetGuard This however does not apply if using an imported HTML page for navigation between the NetGuard client s different views read more about this in Using an HTML Page for NetGuard Navigation To include an HTML page in a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to the required position in the view When you release the mouse button over the required position the Import HTML Page window opens 2 In the Import HTML Page window s Url field type the URL of the required HTML page example http www mywebsite com mywebpage htm Always include the http prefix 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 204 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc or If the HTML page is stored locally on your computer specify its location on your computer example C myfiles mywebpage htm or click t
395. you have access to shared views creating further views in your NetGuard EVS will not be necessary unless you want to supplement the shared views with private views of your own If you want to create views yourself for example if you do not have access to any shared views the NetGuard EVS client s Setup tab lets you create groups and views and specify which cameras should be included in each view see How to Create amp Manage Views Note The way shared views work varies slightly depending upon which type of surveillance system you connect to see Surveillance System Differences for details How to Check if Shared Views are Available Typically your surveillance system administrator will have told you if you have access to shared views Alternatively to quickly determine whether any shared views are available to you do the following Note This method requires that your user rights permit you to access the NetGuard EVS client s Live tab and or Browse tab Most users will have access to at least one of these tabs 1 Go to the NetGuard EVS client s Live or Browse tab 2 On the Live or Browse tab look at the Views section 3 The Views section will always contain a top level folder called Private The Private top level folder is for accessing private views its content depends entirely upon which views if any you have created for yourself Any other top level folders in the Views section are for accessing shared views The names of such o
396. you set a Patrolling period you may be able to select between several patrol schemes This will depend upon how many patrol schemes have been specified in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window You select the required patrol scheme from the Patrol scheme list located below the calendar section If you set patrolling periods with different patrol schemes immediately following each other in time changes between patrolling schemes will be indicated by a thin vertical line see also Colored Bars in the following Note The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 56 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Colored Bars The calendar uses colored bars to indicate active periods for each option Online E mail SMS etc In the Online bar active periods are indicated in either pink or yellow Pink indicates that the selected camera is continuously transferring images to the NetDVR software Yellow indicates that the selected camera transfers images to the NetDVR software when a specified event occurs In the E mail bar active periods are indicated in blue In the SMS bar active periods are indicated in green In the Sound bar active periods are indicated in red
397. ys simply overwrite the value in the Days to keep field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the Days to keep field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 Tip Read more about NetDVR logging in About Logging Advanced The Advanced section lets you specify a number of additional settings Check Box Description Disable Screen Update Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service theRecording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Turns off screen update in the Monitor application If selected all camera images displayed in the Monitor application will remain static with the note Screen Update OFF displayed across the image from each camera This will free up system resources resulting in improved system performance but will prevent users from viewing any live images through the Monitor application Select this option if the Monitor application is not used on a daily basis e g if the Monitor application is only used when the system administrator adjusts the software configuration Keyframe only decoding Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the record
398. ysical conditions day night windy calm weather etc The Adjust Motion Detection window Access You access the Adjust Motion Detection window by clicking the Motion Detection button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Before you configure motion detection sensitivity for a camera it is highly recommended that you have configured the camera s image quality settings such as resolution compression etc in the Configure Device window and that you have specified any areas to be excluded from motion detection for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background in the 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 33 Administrator Application On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Define Exclusion Regions window If you later change image quality settings and or exclusion area settings you should always test motion detection sensitivity settings afterwards The Adjust Motion Detection window features two sliders one for setting Noise Sensitivity and one for setting Motion Sensitivity Noise Sensitivity The Noise Sensitivity slider determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded as motion Insignificant changes which should not be regarded as motion are considered acceptable noise hence the name of the slider With a high noise sensit
399. ystem Differences Even when using your NetGuard EVS with a surveillance system supporting this feature being able to use this feature requires that notifications on events have been configured on the surveillance system server Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt When images from the camera are viewed on the Live tab it is possible to get a simple sound alert when events related to the selected camera occur Always off Do not use sound alerts when events related to the camera occur Always on Play a sound alert each time an event related to the camera occurs What is an event An event is a predefined incident occurring on the surveillance system Depending on the surveillance system s configuration events may be caused by input from external sensors connected to cameras by detected motion by data received from other applications or manually through user input Events are used by the surveillance system for triggering actions Typically most events on the surveillance system are generated automatically For example detected motion can be defined as an event which in turn triggers an action such as recording on a camera Will I receive lots of sound notifications If you select Always on the amount of event related sound notifications you are likely to receive will depend on the nature and number of events related to the camera in question Events are configured on the surveillance system server consult your su
400. yyymmddhhmmss avi year month day hour minute second example 20050630160430 for a file with a start time of 16 04 30 on 30th June 2005 The name will automatically appear in the AVI File Name field The default file name format is independent of regional settings on your computer You are always able to change the default file name to a name of your choice simply by overwriting the default file name Remember that the file name must include the avi file extension 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com page 214 Remote Access On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 11 Specify export destination If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of your PC If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 12 Click the Export link to begin the export The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export Tip If you are exporting very long sequences expor

NetDVR - Moonblink Communications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents